lliKtitU |Utt«BCtl% Sibcacg .Hmfaii "IPif aI* Gt\-!5^" * ■■:.-;* JiA. ' f ."." ! f ' ^ ' " ""*' -i--.-i.i*>i^-- ;**•■- """wi*^- -••••"■'■•-"•• Z56.M86 =^riB79'"'"' "^ OmmMe Dhontn»Bi,er. and r 3 ,..-*-. 3 1924 029 486 408 fellimliiiiiiirMf*^'''* 9" z Cornell University Library The original of tliis book is in the Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924029486408 THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHER, AND KEPORTER'S GUIDE: A.N II«rX)TjqTI-V3S EXPOSITION" OW PHOJSrOGEAPHY, WITH ITS APPLICATION TO ALL BKANCHES OF BEPOETINff, AND AFFORDING THE FULLEST INSTRUCTION TO THOSE WHO HAVE NOT THE ASSISTANCE OF AN ORAL TEACHER; ALSO INTENDED AS A SCHOOL-BOOK. REVISED EDITION, By JAMES E. MUNSON, OFmCIAL STEKOQBAPHEB, N. T. SDPESIOB COUBT; LAW Aid) GEHEBAL TEBBATIM BErOB'F' EB SINCE 1857; AT3TH0B OF THE "DIGHONABT OF PKAOTIOAL PHOKOGBA- TBT," KIC, AMD EDIIOB OJ "HDSSOS'B FHOKOGBAPmC NEWa." NEW YORK: HABPER & BKOTHEBS, PUBLISHERS, PBAHKLIN BQTJABE. 18 79. 01^N:J£.LL ^' l'NIVl£US-n Y Oopjii^ 1877, hf JAua B. Humoii. Eniand ■rwrttng to Act of OoDgren, in the year 1866, by JAMBS E. Humoir, Kb iIm Oflico of Ite libiariu of Congmi, «t WuUngton. PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. The first edition of the Complete Phonographer was published ia December, 1866. Daring the ten years that it has been before the public many old phonographers have been convelrted to the new sys- tem of Practical Phonography, attracted by the simplicity of its- fun- damental principles and the completeness of its practical adaptation to the requirements of the' verbatim reporter. And the number of new phonographers who have acquired their first and only knowledge of shorthand from this source is legion. In fact, the system has ad- vanced so rapidly in public favor that it is now the most popular in Ainerica. As was naturally to be expected, however, further experience, in- cluding ^the preparation of a Phonographic Dictionary, has added to the author's knowledge of the application of phonography to the writ- ■ ing of the language ; and from time to time changes of a minor char- acter-have been made in the details of the system, until the old edition ceased to be a perfect exponent of it. To remove this defect in the text-book, and'to render it a much more efficient instructor than ever before, a thorough revision has been made, so that it corresponds in every respect with the system as it is now best written. The chief changes that have been made, and to vi'hioh special at- tention is invited, are the following : 1. The order of the Alphabet of Consonant Signs, on page 18, is restored to that originally used in the early editions of Phonography, namely, pee, bee, tee, dee, chay,jay, kay, gay, ef, vee, ith, dhee (pro- nounced the), ess, zee,. isK, zhee, l^e, er, tee, em, en, ing, way, yay, hay. Several changes in the text have been made, that were'neees- sitated by this change in tlie order of the consonant arrangement. 2. The list of Wordvsigns has been perfected, and the arrangement made to correspond with the changed order of the Alphabet of Con- sonants. 3. The chapter on Prefixes and Suffixes has been entirely rewrit- ten, and some new and important features added. 4. Two lists of Word-signs and Contractions are given, one ar- 1 iv PBEFACB TO TUK KLTISKD KDITION. nBged in tbc oider of the A, B, C Alphabet, ud Uie other in tlia order of the Ali^wbet of Phooognphio Coasonamt Signs— the first aa oaed while writing phooognphy, and the other while reading it. Theae liats biTO been kept witliin small compass by confining tbcm to the abbreTiaisd outlines n( primitiM words only ; and they arc to be thoroughly niMnortsed so tliai they can be written and read without any hcailalkm. When this has been done, the outlines of the words derived from them will bo readily formed by general rules. But fur the sake of ready reference, and to prevent possible error, a third list, cuioprising the outlines of deriTatives, has been also added. This mode of presenting the Word-sigits and Contractions will render their Mqnisilioa much easier than ever before. ft. The ebapler on Phraae-writing has been rewritten, new matter added, and the list of Phrases ooosiderably extended. 0. Tlie cha|iler on Reporting has been enlarged, and a great num- ber of forms for Ike use of the reporter iotroduoed. In this depart- ment will be found a fund of information as to the details of reporting littt is to be obtained in no other work on shorthand writing, 7. The Reading Esereises are entirely now, and consist of forty instead of tluity<4wo pages, as in the former editions. They are girco in a plain, bold style of phonographio outlines, th\t are much more legiUe than those in the (dd eserciscB, or than are usually given m phonographio books. 8. The ** Lewons" are also new, and greatly improved. These, together with the Reading Eierciscs, have been compiled and ar- rayed with apeenl reference to their efficiency in scheol instruction. 0. The book eloses with extended Writing Exercises for the use of the teacher and the advanced learner, and a complete set of Ques- tioiis on the entire coarse. The author wishes to aeknowledge his great indebtedness to Mr. C. A. Walworth, who, during the past six years, has been the in- stnictor in Practical Phonography at the College of the City of New York, for anggeationa and assistance during the preparation of these rcviaioos. The new Reading Exercises and "Lemons" were pre- pared by Imn. The diafiing of the fin^ P^gM of Reading Exercises was done by Mia. Amalia Berrian, a lady whose enthusiasm for the " beautiful art" is only equalled by the wonderful speed and skill that she has been aUe to attain in writing it PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION The use of Phonograpliy by shorthand writers has become so gen- eral, and the superiority of the system over all other kinds of ste nograjihy so universally acknowledged, that it is now unnecessary to say anything of its comparative merits, or to press its claims upon the public, for no one about to commence the study of shorthand would think for a moment of taking up any other. The principles, too, of the Science of Phonetics, upon which Phonography is based, are, in a sort of general way, so commonly understood, that an extended ex- planation of them seems to be no longer necessary. It is, however, highly proper, on presenting this new phonographic instruotion-Tsook to the public, that I should state my reasons for so doing, and more es- pecially as it introduces several important modifications of the system. The leading features of Phonography are the result of the labors of , Mr. Isaac Pitman of England, who for nearly thirty years has devoted much of his time to its. development and propagation ; but the high degree of perfection to which it has. been brought, is owing in great measure to the suggestions of thousands of practical phonpgraphers, both in England and the United States. This mode of development has its merits and demerits. Coming as it has from the brains of such a vast number and variety of people, Phonography possesses a richness of material which could hardly have been obtained in any other way ; but, on the other hand, tWs kind of growth has had a tendency to render the system less uniform and consistent in matters of detail than it would have been had it emanated from a single mind. " Kow, my first aim has been to restore, as far as possible, simplicity and harmony, by adhering to general- principles and discarding all unnecessary expedients ;' and my second, to more completely adapt the system to the requirements of the reporter. Mr. Pitman, in his very laudable desire and efforts to bring the benefits of Phonography witliin reach of the masses of England, has seriously, and as I thin unnecessarily, impaired it as a mere system of stenography. Thi work, however, has lieen prepared expressly in the interest of report ing, and hence everything that would tend to hinder the learner in acquiring sl kua^ledge of, the art for that purpose, has been omittetL VI PBSFACE. With thb Mid In view, wlut b tcnaed the "Oorravoudins Styla'' uT rboaagttbr hmt been entirely diKXidod, tooraae Ita tondeiH^ wM to Coeter • duoonnedod and length/ st/le of writing wholljr inoom- latifale with rqMKting habils: for, as it ta a prindple of the homan mind that fint impeaaona are the most lasting, it often takes yean of pnclioe tn folly aoqolie the "Beporting Style" when the writer boa onoe Indnlged himself for any oonsiderahlo time In the use of the "OonHpoodiog." In fMt, I bsTe often Iieord many of the oldort ftportcfs say (and I will add that it also accords with my own oxpu- rience) that in very rapid reporUng they were sUli Ironllod with a tendency to tt«e long and disconnected forms ; or, in other «'ords, to letoro to the forms and style of writing tiiat they used wlitle loamtng. Tberefore, instewl of dividing Fhonogrsphy into two disUnct styles, one to be nsod as a stcpping-etone to the other, I liave treated it as one nnliroltcn systcai, and bare andeaTorod to furnish a series of les- sons that will oosidact the learner as rapidly as posiiUlo, and withoui any inlcrm«dkt« baitiog, directly to a knowledge of the princlplot and proetioe of the ait In its highest development Tlie other meat imporiiuit changes that I have mode are those of eimpUfloation ; and in this rsqwet I have merely ndhonid or returned to fstaWiiiMid rales and inlociples where other aulhon have departed from tbeoL And this has been done at an occasional saorifloo of ^pyarsri bnvlly, thoogfa not of nat or fraeUoal brevity ; for it must Im bonMr in mind that swift writing is quite as much a mentol os a man ool process, and oonaeqnently any attempt to shorten the outlines of words Iqr exceptional espedients, or by deviations ttom genonl rules, is only tnnsfeniog the labor from the fingers to the brain, and sbonhl never be done unless the gain In bnyitf is very marked,'as the hesilatian caused by the anomalous form is apt to more than con- some tlie lime saved by the relief to the hand. These seemingly obvioas principles have heretofore been but little understood by writ- cn on the snl^ect of Phonography, and tlie system has in oonseqnencs become so compUeoted by eioeptionid forms and ezpodieuts tliat it has as yet foiled to exhibit its foil powers. In one of the earliest Ameri- osn ^unogiaphic books° this tendency to oompUcation is noticed and depMcaled. The writer says, " Wlio does not know that a few hnn- diod woi^ snbject to exceptional or particular rules tiirow doubt and ucertolniy over every word in the language." This remark must not, bowevtr, be construed as condemning the use of oontrsctions, %r, to use the woids of tiie same writo-, •' imperfect skeletons create H> eonfiisioa, inswnm^i as if the contraction happens to be unknown • Thi nomEnpUc Word-Book Xo. 1. by Aodtews * Bojls. VUt. PEEFACE. VI 1 to the writoi, he merely writes the word in full, and no breaeh of any rule is committed ; while, when known, they contribute to brevity, and seldom, in any case, cause any difaculty in reading. They ought, therefore, to be provided for, and are not to be considered as falling under the condemnation of exceptional and particular rules." , The chief material phonographic change introduced in this work, bcGause it is the one upon which most of the other modifications de pend, is the adoption of the vowel-scale of Isaac Pitman's Tenth Edi- tion. This scale differs from the old one in the inversion of the order II the dot- vowels (the dash- vowels remaining the same as before), a« shown in the following arrangements : OLD SCALE. KEW SCALE. e, i — aw, 6 ah, a — aw, 6 a, e — 0, u a, e — 6, u ah, a — 00, 55 6, i — do, 56 So radical a change as this would not be adopted by me except for what I consider to be good, and, indeed, imperative reasons ; in fact, nothing would justify it unless it can be shown that the new scale offers some, very considerable advantages over the old. This, how- ever, I think I shall have no difficulty in fully demoiistrating. But, as no , gains can ever be secured . in Phonography by introducing changes, without some corresponding losses, and as such losses are always sure to present themselves to the casual observer a groat deal sooner, and with much more force, than the gains, it will be necessary for me to state this matter somewhat in detail. The most important fundamental principle of Phonetics is what is terined the "Second Law" of Dr. Latham, which requires ".that sounds, within a determined degree of likeness be represented by signs within a determined degree" of likeness ; while sounds beyond a certain degree of likeness be represented by distinct and different signs, and that uniformly." The observance of this law in the arrangement of the various details of the phonographic system has made it the most perfect and scientific method of shorthand writing ever devised, \ In the representation of the consonant-sounds the rule has been strictly carried' out, and, although a few exceptions occur, they are only such as could not possibly be avoided. Thus, we see the four Gutturals kay, gay, ing, and hay represented by four df the horizontal signs ; the SIX Palatals chay, jay, ish, zhee, ree, and yay hy signs inclined to the l%.lit; the sis Dentals iee, dee, ees, zee, ith, and.rfte. by perpendicular Bigns ; and the five Labials j^ee, bee, ef, vee, and way by signs inclined to the leift. Agun, the distinction between the breath-consonants ami the subypcals is very appropriately marked by a mere difference is till rSBTACR. Uu ^01011$. Bat when wo como to the Towda, a vei r matorial d* Tktkn b nen, for In the old Towd-wsale tlita Important law mmm» to hare been in a measure ignored or rlolatod, and that without tli« •scon (rf a leal or even aniarent naoeHitf. By examining Into the natnn of tiM Towd-aoon^ it wUi be found that they are ■uaceptibit of three di&rwt and distinct daasiftoaUons ; namely, into long and sliort Towds. palatals and labials, and into open and doae Towela. Now, in the old Towd-eeale the first two of these daasiflcalions are very aitptofirialdy ani fully shown ; Uio first by employing heary dgns for long, and light signs for short rowels ; and the second, by wiiUttg the pdatds with dot^Igns, and the UbiaU with daahes. Dul the third, and th« most Important daariacotion praotieally, and the one that should hare been Indicated by Uie marlced diatinotion of dit femoe of poattion, b cntirdy orerlooked. In the new vowel-scale Ihfa gbilng defiict b remoTod, and tlio oonatolenoy and harmony of the ^FStem oom|deldy restored. Still, if the innovatloa had not carried along with it graat piactiod bencat, as wdl os the more mental sntlii- CKtioo of heing right in prindple, I should probably never have felt Jnsilfled in making iL Indeed, It was the practical gain to be derived ftom the chaiHse whidi first attracted my attention. But I have found In this instance, •• on many other ocoadons while preparing thb work, iliat it was ImpossiUa to srfaiate prindple from practice, and that the more iraplidily I obeyed gtmeml and ftodamentol rulM, and the mora doady I adhensd l4^ oorreet prindplea, rejecting at much as {josslblo all expedients and eonpromlMa, the leas difficulty I bad with my In tlie early part of my experience as a shorthand reporter, some eight or nine years ago, I found, and I hod also heard it remarked by other*, that in swift writing a great deal of uncertainty was oftentimes ooaaed by the bMlistinctacss of the tick or dash wonl-dgns, arisfaig bma the UahDIty, on the one hand, of mistaking them for lialf- length signs, and on the other, of confounding lliem with the dot word- signs. TUs dilBcnlty I ooncdved the idea of remedying, by substi- tnting for these tidu, fhll-loigth stem dgns, which would not only •dfer the great advantage of bdug always distinct, but, as a compen- sation for loss of brevity owing to the increased length, and sometbnes the carvatore (rf the new signs, would furnish much greater Csciiity hi piuaae writing, tana the application to them of tiie various prindplM of ablmjviation and oonsonant modification, wUdi was not possible with the tick-signa. But at the very outset of my attempt I enoonn lered a aeitons obstacle, and one which Ibr a time seemed insnrmonnt able. I found that as the voweb were then amagad it would h» imonsabic to effect anything but a partial reform in tids respect, ex PEEFACE. IX cept by throwing a great many words out of their proper positions and thus, while removing one defect, introduce or augment anothei perhaps equally undesirable. However, after a long series of experi- ments, in which Mr. Charles E. Wilbour gave me very valuable as- sistance, I discovered that by reversing the order of the dot-vowels of the old scale, the difficulty of position would also disappear ; and 1 immediately adopted the new scale, introduced the proposed change in- rngard to tlio word signs, and have continued to use these improve- incuts ever since. There are also other advantages that have arisen from the use of the new scale, one of the most important and practical of which is the in- creased legibility it gives to Phonography. Formerly, when broad, open vowels were paired with close ones, if by accident, in writing vocalized Phonography, a first-place vowel was a sort of " neutral,'' that is, neither a proper dot nor a proper dash, we had to choose be- tween the dissimilar sounds e and aw, — the one not being at all sug- gestive of the other. In the new scale we iave tO' choose between ah and aw, two sounds so similar that the one would, in all probability , immediately suggest the other. Thus, an occasional stumbling in the reading of phonogra,pMo writing, owing to uncertainty as to the in- tended character or length of » vowel-sign, is rendered much less likely to occur in the new scale than in the old. It is also properly claimed by the advocates of the new scale that it is an improvement upon the old one, because in practice it renders the process of writing the vowel-signs much briefer and more simple than it was before. For instance, as the short vowel a. (the sound of a in mad) is much oftener used than the vowel i (the sound of i in pin) as the initial sound of words, and as it is the common practice of phonographers, although ia deviation from the general rule, to write the signs of initial vowels before commencing to write the consonant outline, it follows that a is more conveniently, as well as most appropriately, written in the first positi:;n. Again, the sound i is best written in the third position, because that vowel (which is often represented in the common spelling by the letter y) occurs much more frequently than any other at the end of words, and immediately preceding th<> last consonant or syllable of a word. By writing first according to thb old scale, and then according to the new, such words as pUi/, aty, Al- (antie, ability, apt^, fossil, many, etc., the gain will be very apparent. ITien, too, the third position for final \ comes more easily to the writer's band than does the first, because there is an analogy betWEon (he position which it now occupies in a phonographic outline, and ift [losition in the common spelling of the word, — ^being in both cases at the end. X PRSFACK. TIm gra^tert pnctiol limeAt, bowovor, that ooraM ttom t)M UM •r the new anrnngcuient of tho vowels, it the Incraaaed Ic^MUly 11 gives to nnvooUaed Fhooognphy, by mora goienlly throwing wimlt UMit oontain the auna or aimiUr ooosonanta into difforent podtiom Hie reaaon at Utis m, that as In the case of cnoh words the oonaoniuita eeaae to be a mean* of dirtiw^on, there is a natuial tendency to make It tif'a maibed diffcnaioe botwoen the sounds of the vowels, and espe- ■ially tltoae npon wlilcb the aooent falls ; and, Itenoe, oa in the new a.-al« tboM ToweI< tliat diffar uoet in aound are lepreacnted b^y signs that diflbr most in poaiiioa, and as words are written in the {xwition of their accented vowels, it foUowt that words of similar outUnea «UI be mora likely to IoIm positioDS distinct from each other, than tr the old scale were n*ed. It was this veiy peculiarity of the noM •cole tlut so nadily and completely solved the problem— of which lovoUoo lias already been made— of replacing the tiok-slgni by simple cems. wilboat detriment to the system. It l»as been a oomraoi fault with writers of •tenogmphiolMokB, ttoia lite iKsioohig of sliortlMuid down to the present day, to ploglsriae to an nnlimiled astsnt tnm other aathois, trusting no doubt to tlie almoet universal ignoraooe of the pabUo in regard to tho ark, or to lu mystery, to screen their wttoleaale {dradea from detection. To the iMnor of auibun of pbonofftaphic wmks, however, it sliouid be said, that they have vaiy generally been exceptions to tbb rule. In emula- tion of tlie more lioMnable of tbeae wrilon, and als'j fay way of a pur- sonat acknowMgment on my port to thoee who tiave so kindly and freely assisttd me in prrpaiing this work, I propose, as l>rio6y as po»- atble, to give tlie cndit of the more important changes now intru- daesd, to wliom it lightftilly beioogt. niere is piobalily no een brought. To Mr. J. A. Hactanchlon, whose In- fotigationa rejecting tiic vowels, and the best modes of lepretenting them, bavebeen veiy extensive, bdongs the aedit of having firstaug- gested the idea of ananging and representing the gioup-vowek so^ stBT.tially as I have done in my donble-Towel adicmea. The nom«» PREFACE. XI clature that I have adopted is the same as that given by Mr. Pitman in the Seventh Edition of his Manual, with a few slight changes adapt- ingit to the recent alterations of tlie system. The yay and way hooka were first suggested by myself. I take this opportunity, too, of ex- pressing my obligations to the reporters of New York generally for the interest they have manifested in this work, and for the encouragement they have so constantly extended tc5 me during its preparation ; and especially should I thank Mr. Andrew Devine, whom I have often ■cnsulted on doubtful points, and whose reliable judgment has Icen of very great service to me. The engraving of the illustrations in the text aud of the Beading Exercises was done by the skillful hand of Mr. Chaimccy B. Thome, of Skaneateles, N. T. ; and for neatness, clear- ness, and beauty, I confidently assert that this work has never been jqualed by any other phonographic engraver. And when we considei that the whole of it was done over three hundred miles away from thi author, its entire freedom from errors and mistakes is almost marvel ous. To the carefulness and attention of the reader of the proofs of this work, Mr. Stephen Jenkins, is due in great measure the high de- eree of accuracy of the letter-press matter. While preparing this work, I have consulted all the phonographic instruction books, and most of the phonographic periodicals, thath3,ve been published from time to time in this country 'and in England, as well as quite a number of works on other systems of stenography ; also many phonetic works, including those of Mr. A. J. Ellis, and Dr. Iia- tham's "Hand-Book of the English Language.'' I have, however, derived by far the most assistance from the old, but very philosophic, works of Andrews and Boyle. 1* TABIE OF CONTENTS. Fexfaoe to EKTiaiB Edition Page 3 Phejaoe to Fiebt Ebitios.. 5 bxplanation of tkicma,...,. 17 TabLK Of CONS.INAHTS 18 SIMPLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. Consonant Defined— Number of Consonants — Bemarks on the Table of Couao- nants— Olaseifioation of the Consonants— Qnality of Consonants— Formation of Consonant-Sounds— Origin of the Consonant-Signs— Analogy in the Ap- propriation of the Signs -^Mnemonic Assistance in Learning the Phono- graphs.. 19-23 OF THE MANNER OF WRITING THE CONSONANT-SIGNS. Exceptions— Chay and Ree distinguished— Hints to the Beginner- Length of Phonographs— Shading of the Heavy Sighs, etc.— Phonographic Speed— Uxer- oises to be Read as well as Written 24-20 SIMPLE VOWELS. Definition— Number of Vowel-Sounds- Mbtuoti op Vooauzation— Vowel-Scalk —Names of the Vowels- Keckouiug of Vowel-Positions- Vocalization, op SIHOI.J! Consonant-Stems- Consonant Always Written First— Method of Beading Single Vocalized Consonant-Stems — ^Manner of Writing the Vowel- Signs— The Vowel-Scale not Perfectly Phonetic — Two Soiiiids Sometimes Represented by Ohe Sign , , 20-28 DIPHTHONGS. Definition— Number of Diphthongs— Analysis of the Diphthongs— Remarks on ■ the" Diphthong EW— Table op DirnTnoNOS- Direction of the Biphthong-Signs Never Changed— Two Vowels Concurring— Diphthong I Joined to Conso- nants ^ , 30-32 CONSONANT POSITIONS. Position .of Hobizontal Stems — Position of .Pekpendioulah and Inolined Stems .- 32 JOINING THE CONSONANT-STEMS. Consonant-Stems Repeated— Mode of Joining Certain Stems— Order of Reading Cbusonant-Stems. 33 METHOD OF WRITING VOWELS BETWEEN CONSONANT-SIGNS. Rule— Excep.tiona ;.... 34 POSITION OF WORDS. When a Word ia Written in Position— Examples— Mental and Manual Procesa in Writing Phonography 34, 35 XIV TABLE OF OOXTENTB. pooKooa&riuc analysu. Ceooal Bale— Tke Bv MMad bj dm ICjrs— Void* Spelled Alike bat Frononnoed UaknuUy— Word* PmooiiiKsd Alike bat Spelled UKhrenUj— Caolluu ra- fOtite CO. SU. Til, and MG-W aod T at Ibe Xiid of STllablet-Oouble tmawiii SuBMda Bara— DiapaiUr In Namber Between Leiiara and Soonda — <^ % and Z— M Befiira Ibe tjoanda ot Ear and Oay— SUeot Lotten Omittad — Vteal K s«MnI>7 EUeot— BW Mut Uted after B— Uuacoauted Vowel* : tieaetal Wale ltinip t fa » n« P aoMOoaAruio Srauaia Pago VA-SI) ESS AKO ZKB CIBCLB. hm— of Ibe EM-Cticie— Helbod of Julnlng the CliOe to Cooeonant-Stem*— Xnaea uTibe B»Ctide Oompoauda— tiame SIsn Caad fur Bn aud Zdo— Ba* and Zm DlHlBgaiahad— HcnioD or Wanma rna CiaoLa BarwiaN Two Cmmanrf»mt Short Bale— Vooaliutiom or Sruia wrrn Ciaoua At- iioacv— Order of Writing— Order of Keading— Oaullon t Tbe Clrole Juluad tu U|>'4iinik« IMaau— VooAuiATiOK wnan ma CtaoLc Ooanai ih tub MinuLa or a Woa » C m at Ibe Ctrclo— Bxceptlon*— Wben Uio Stem-Blgii should be l'tadlii>i«ado(tbeCli«le ^s^-^» TOB LABOB CIBCLB. Kaaw and I'm of lb* Larfc Circle— Tbe L«ige CIrele Juliiod lo Cunitiiuaut-Btami — Voaiuuftoa or Irrum witn lua L*Boa Ctaoui ATTtouau— Vucullialluu at Ibe Large Circle— Bw and Sea Soanda UUttugalabed— Loon roa ST on ED, Am VTB-Sotall Loop, ST or ZD— Laige Loop, STB— Mamas of ibe Loopa— VwalUaikn of Sunoa triib Loops AUiiebsd-aiiiall Loop Bbaded fur XD-ne8auUCIideAdd«iloSI8,ST,aiHl8Tlt 4»^ BrLEi FOB TUB CSB OP ISO, SUEB, EL, LEB, BR, AMD BEB. l"iw of I>b— r«ra nf 8lMe-Rliher bh or Sboa-ITMS of El— Uses of lee-Ellber ElarLse-l-i««arEr-L'MaofBe*-EllberBrofl(ee 48-41 OBOCP COXSOXAXTS AJfD THEIB SIOKS-INITIAL nOOKS. The Uqnid* L and B— Tna EMttooaa-Tna Ea-Hoaiu— Names of tbe El and Er Book ComUnatkHw-CaaUoii— Mnenonie Asslslance In Learning the El and Br Book Hltn»— VooAUXATioii or Dau>i.B ConsoKAHT-Sioiia-Order of Read- lag Vocallaad Doable Consoaant-Slgns— Uses of tbe El and Er Honk Signs— B or Er Book Hljos Joloed to Prccedlne Slcms-Exeeptlnn, Bel-SraoKi. Vnctutittm-Two P.irm. for 8L, SB, ZL, ZB-TlieIr Ures at the Com- •ncacement of Word*— The EvM^irde Preflxed lo Ibe El and Erllook Signs— ne ardes and ST Loop Prcdzol lo the Stnlebt Er-Hook Signs-Order of Keading Voeallwd Spel and Sper 8lKn»— Tm W»t tlnna- Ths Yat Book— UooK ran Bi^ la, oa Ca-Xame aod C« of tbe Initbil En-Hook 4I-M FINAL HOOK AXD OTHER MODIFICATIONS. ** 1^^" nooaa-Hames of tbe Ef-Hook Compoandn-Vorallzntlnn-Bale t.r Writing-Unle far Beadlng-Bf and Vee DIstlnguUbed-Bf and Vee Honk on Cnms— Ea-HooB-Nanwa of Ibe En-Hook Oompnniida— Tocallxallon— When an ^ or Bn Hook ahonid Not be Dsed-Suoa Hooaa-Name. of the Shnn- HnokOomp.mnda-Voeallxallon-ShenUredlnrteadofShnD-SmiinHookf.w Sbnn-Iis Namfr-HooK ma TB. THB, oa DHR-Nsmea of tbe Tr-IInok and lu Coavomda-Ter and Oer Dbtlngolshed-Speclal V.«allsaUoii of the Ter- naak— CiBOLSs Am Lnnra Aimm to tus FocAt n<«K Siena— Eas^rcle A^ I" .?• J^.^°"i?rr* '"' *''"~* Bn-Hook ffigns-arelea and Loops Added l« the Straight Bn-Hook SIgna-Namas of Ibe CnrnUnatloiis of Stems, TABLE OF CONTENTS. . XV Pinal Hooks, and Circles or Loops— Cantion : The En-Hodk Circles Seldom Used in the Middle of Words— Bss-Ciicle Used for Ens— The Ess-Civde and Ishnu Added to the En-Hook Circles and Loops— The Ess-Circle Added to Ishun- Final Hooks Used in the Middle of Words— Circle Inside of Hoots— LiiNSTmsNisG— Bouble-Length Carved Signs — Names of Donble-Length Curves— Positions of Lengthened Stems— Positions of Horizontal Stems- Positions of Downward Lengthened CuiTes-Positions of Upward Lengthened Curves— Tocallisation of Lengthened Curves— Final Hooks Read Before the Added Consonants— Lengthening of Straight Stems with Final Hooks- Final Circle or Loop to be Bead After the Added Consonants— Special Vocalization — Balviko— Half-Length Stems— Names of the Half-Length Signs — Caution : Halving of Stems with Final Circles or Loops Attached— Positioks op Hai-f- Lknotb Stems— Horizontal Stems— Perpendicular and Inclined Stems— Vo- calized Half-Length Signs— Order of Heading— Dee and Tee Distinguished— Special Eemakks tipoii the Halp-Lenotus— Improper Joinings— Sht' After Ef or Vee— Straight Half-Lengths in Same Direction Not Allowed— Syllables Ted and Ded— Half-Lengths Dissjoined- Est Struck Upward— Medial Vowel After Half-Length— Stem-Signs for Tee or Dee Before a Final Vowel— Am- . , biguous Outlines, How Avoided— Half-Length Lee for Lt— The Stems Lee-Dee for lid- Halt-Length Eee for Et, etc.— Two Vowels before Final Tee or Dee- Final Dee Preceded by El, Bee, or En, etc Upward and Downward Stems Halved '. Page 53-63 GROUP VOWELS AND THEIE SIGNS— IMPEOPEE DIPHTHONGS. General Remarks — Coalescence of the Double-Vowels— Composition of the Double- Vowels— Remarks on the Double-Vowel Signs— Table op Doubi.e- VowEL SioNS— Simple Signs instead of Double Allowable— Tbehle Vowel. SiGNS^Same Sign Used for Other Double or Treble Vowels— License as to Direction of the Gronp-Vowel Signs 6t-(iG ADDITIONAL COKSONANT-SIGNS. - Dot-Sign for H— Tick or Dot-Sign with Wh— Brief Signs for W and T— The Nom- inal Consonant ■ • 67 ST:dNOTTPY. Cohsohamtb— ' Shee,' ' Lee,' ' Ee,' and 'Ess'— Stenotjpes of Stems. and of Cir- ■ cles. Hooks, etCi Distinguished— Stenotypes of Shaded Circles, etc.— Steuo- types of Outlines Containing More than One Stem- Ess -Circle Between Stems — Vowels 67-70 ;GBNEEAL KEMAEKS ON OUTLINES OF WORDS. Special Diekotions as to Cbktain Odtlines- Initial Letters— Final Syllables _' -Ly '— ' -Ey '— ' -Ty '— ' In ' and ' On '— ' -Tnre '—The Past Tense . ; . . 70-73 ABBREVIATION. Omissios op Vowels— Vowels to be Omitted— Vowels to be Inserted— Wobiif ■ DlSTINQniSnED BY DiPEEKENCE OP . OUTLINE, POSITION, etC— WordS Coitl- •mehciug with 'U,' 'Im,' 'In,' 'Ii>' 'Un,' 'En'— List of Words Distinguished byDiffereince of Outline, Position, or Vocalization— Omission op Comso- HANTS— WOED-SlGSS—IJBt of Word-SigUS— 'Now' aUd^'NeW,'— OOMTRAO- TTOKS— PrefljEes and Snifixes— Prefixes- Suffixes- Omission of Certain Conso- nants-Words Ending in ' -ntial-ly '-Omission of Hooks— List of Word.-SignE and Contractions— A, B, C Order— Phonographic "Order-^REMAEKS on tiiii ■yVoED-SiSNS AND CoNTEACTioNS— Same Sign for Present and Past Tenses— The Plnral of Nonns- The Possessive Case of Nouns— Third Person Singnlai of Verbs— Same Sign for Adjective and Adverb ■. 74-96 Xn TABLE OF OOiiTENTS. PmUSBOORAFHT. Tm KlmU of Piuaaa-Cneus um loon-'Aa,' rv"It,' or ■ Tbo ' Adilcd bf ChaiiBi>>S t^ Circle to a Soull Ump— 'Thare,' 'Ilialr,' or 'TYaij ai«' Add- adbfChaagbiB Uw Circle to a Laigs Loop— Tna Ilooxa— * All' or * Will* Add. •dbr lbs B-Hook— • Ar^"OBr.'or Book aad Bahrfav Prioditlo— Cumbloaiioo ofForagoiDg Prlnelplet— Wordt Witttaaby an Initial and Pinal UodUcatlon of Un Pracadlog Blem— PaemoM or rmiinflinia. Bro.—BseepUona— Certain Worde DUtlDsoltbed— ■ Ever' and 'Ban* Plrtbunlidted-Tlcka Ibr < I," A," An,' and 'And'— Hookt on Tkki-'L' 'A,' or 'And* Ibllaired by 'COn' or 'Oon'-'Hck tor •Tbe' and *tU~icMuf oTTkka eriib CbclMi, Loop*, etc— ' -log Tbo' aud '-lug A-n'- Brief Hgaa ftir • We,' ' Woald.' and ' Ton *-' Of' OmlUed-'Or* Followed by 'Oamf or 'drn'—'Tcf or 'Too' OmlUed and Indicated by a Ponrlh Poaldon— ■Praai— TV Ondlted— ■ Aad' Omlilad— BoLia ma PuaMn-Wannia— Qonml Itnle Wpedel Kaioe— Lor or Pnaxaai— Sfuiai. Pnajtai aao Wobd Ooktbao- P«gsB«-4U PQXCTCATION AND OTBEB UABK& acnS4i. Ke»«n«« en PBaoreAnoK— The Period— ExcUroalloo and Interroga- Uoa Mm— Pai inlb nwi andBraekela Paib— Aoomct— BnpuAaii— OxriTAU — lanuta or Paom HAina, na— Oonaonaot luiUala— Caution— Vowel In- Itlale InWili nf THIitT Wimena. no,— Ptaouogfapblc ngam lU-lU POaan MoMrtao bt Manas US 'OX PREPAKIXO COPT AMD BEADIKO PBOOF. PBar4B*iioa or Corr— Paoor-ltaAinao- SrsotMBB or a Coaacoritn Paonr- Baxar- Brnonai oa OrroeriB Pao* CaaaaonD- Tbe Cmwulng of Fe- tnuch UI-Ml BEPORmtO. anaaAi. Wm i ara Wpe od of Phonography— Bpeod Required of Amannenies and Bipor te n LeglbUlty of Pboomrapby— Time Meoeaeary to Acquire Speed— Malatlak Deed bi Wrttlag Phonography— Law BnoRiM— Form of Law- Bcporta— Foaas— Flnt ^ge, Fomu 1, S, t, 4, and 5— Oh TAXtao Mom id Law BarosnMO-Naaie of WUneae, etc— Qnertion and Anawer DlfUngnlibed — Paaa^tee Itariced te CoirecUon-Caiea Cited— BInU on Tranieribbig— KawvAraa Barocmie— Arraamz ••■■■ tH-US PhonagrqiUe Beading Leaaona 14S Ooaneorieaaoaa l»t TripThmnzh tbe land of Cootractiona V» Addltfaoal Writing Bmcbea. »» Key to lOaeenaneaaB ArUdee tIS Qneitiana on tbe Complete Phonograpber K4 Hew daisUcatian and Aztangement of Coneonant-Slgna S3> EXPLANATION OF TERMS. Pno-NEi'ica, Pho-nol'o-qy, or PnoN'ics (from ipuv^, a sound, tone). The science vfliioh treats of the different sounds of the human voice and their modifications. The style of spelling in accordance with this science is called Fhonetio ; the common style, such as is used in this book, being called Eomanic, because the alphabet employed -was de- rived from'that which was used by the Romans. Pho-noi't-pt (from (pwvr;, and rifog, a type). The art of repre- senting sounds by distinct characters or types ; also, the style of printing in accordance with- this art. Pno'NO-TTPE. A tjrpe or character indicating a sound or modifica- tion of sound, used in phonotypic printing, Pho-nog'ea-eht (from tpmijj and ypa^siv, to lorite). A method of writing in which each sound has a distinct letter or character ; also, a system of shorthand invented by Isaac Pitman. Phc'ro-graph. a type or character fer representing a sound ; a character used in Phonography. Pno-NO-GEAPH'io. Eelating to Phonography. Ste-noq'ka-pht (tjom (fTEVog-, narrow, chsa and ypaipsiv). The art of writing by means of brief signs which represent single sounds, groups of sounds, whole words, or groups of words. Note. — Stenographyis a generic teirm, embracing all systeiuf- of short- hand or brief writing; Phonography included ; while P/umojp-aphy is a Bpediic name for a single system. In the arrangement and classification of the consonants at § 10, only the names of the sounds are given. The following table is the same, except that the phonographic signs are shown instead. FronWiouth. Midaie-Mouth. - Back-Montb. \ 1 / \ 1 / .» •v. ( ) J L ( ) J r TABLE OP CONSONANTS. J»-«c \ pee nt inwyiiW, and p in ^y. \ bee M " oM, " A " Aay. 1 leo «f " looktrf, •• t " iMvie. 1 1 / dee ciiay trk " mate*, " d " i/nme. " cA " cAcit. / J-T » " jem. •• j " >t. k.7 e " am, " t- " tilt «^_ ••r yw" U»gu«, " 9 " ^l. ' '^ ef pk " />toM, " / " /in. v^ »ee / " "/. " " vnn. ^ ( iili • •■ • " M " lAigh. 1 ( dbe« lA* " hnalht, " (A " Ihf. 1 ) tm e " Iry, " . "Mat ) IM • " WM, " * " iteal. J yk,am * " wre, " foDow oatore, therefore, and pr e s er ve a corrcqMmdence be tween signs and sounds, and to show their resemblance as well as difference, tiie iyftc or bralk cooaoaaatt aie represented by light at thin linear and their ootrei^iondiiig heaug sounds by tiie same lines shaded. Thus, written in Fhonogrqihy, bag would ^flTer from pag, or dam* from coae, ete., only in tlie heavier shading of tiieir initial dgns bee dtt,e3bc ^ 9. None of tlie mnaining consonants in the table have any profier SIMPLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. , 21 mates in the English langunge, therefore they are not arranged in pairs ; and although the heavy signs ing, way, yay, and hay correspond with the light signs en, er, el, and em, the likeness is accidental, and does not, as .in the case of the others, indicate similarity of sound. CLASSIFICATION OF THE CONSONANTS. ^ 10. The following arrangement of the consonants classifies them ac- cording to their nature or quality and their, mode of formation. To make the view complete, the two compound consonants are inserted. Labials. Breathed* pee Sonant,... bee Breathed. . Labto- aontalB. Lingiio- Palatals. Gutturals. tee _ chay kay dee jay gay ef ilh ess ish vee dhee zee en el zhee er ing Abrupts J Continuants, i (Sonant Nasals Sonant em Liquids ....... Sonant Coalescents Sonant way yay A spirate Breathed . . hay QUALITY OF CONSONANTS. ^ 11. The consonants are arranged in six divisions, called Abrupts, Continuants, Nasals, Liquids, Coalescents, and TAe Aspirate. . I. Ih&'Alrupta are so called because of their abrupt or explosive na- ture, being made by a complete contact of the organs of speech, inter- riiptimg or entirely stopping thg breath or voice. They are the most perfact of .the consonants. Sometimes they are termed Explodmti. II. The Oontmuanis permit a freer escape of the breath or voice, and begin to approximate toward the cllaraoter of" vowels. They, ailmif of indefinite prolongation, and hence their iia,me. ; III. The Nascih combine in their formation the character of the ab rupts and liquids. They are made by complete contact of the parts of the month, while at the same time the sounding breath or voice ii -permitted freely to escape through the nose IV. The ZfjuMfe permit a still freer escape of the breath or voice than the continuants, approaching more nearly than they to the nature of vowels. They have in fact s.> much of the vowel character that • The word Vr^atMd has been used here in preference to whispered, which ■ Ihe one generally, bnt improperly, employed to designate the natare of the ligh sonsonant-sounds. That the term wJiiip'ered does not indicate the true chamctci of the sounds, is clearly demonstrated by the fact that the sonants are as easi'.i' nltored la-wMspe?'- as the ireath consonan's 83 TOB COKFIXTX rBOsoaitAFniR. Omj nadily vnila ^th the other omaoiwnta, forming duub1« wnao oanta, and ■ametimei qrlUilai, wiihoat the kid of any Towei*. V. TIm Caalaeemtt and Uie A^Avi* m lbs feeUeit of all the conio- nanu, leeoiiog to be mere modificationa of Toweii, by which the breath or Toioe is iwy alightly obstmcted. roBXATiox or ooxsox^xr-souicoa. ^ 1!. In ibe arrangement of the consonant-eounda according to tlieir mode of fonatioo, we begin with tboae formed at the lipa alone, a* pet, tm, etc ; and then go back to the leeib and lipa, •• tf, vm; then to the region of ibe tip of the tongue and the teeth, as (m, dm, Me. ; then to the bard iMlate or roof of the moaih, as M, aAas, etc ; and finally to the root of the toogae, near the throat, as tag, gay, etc Hence those sev- eral dasMS are called, I. LMali; IL Labio-imUd$ / III. Li»gwo-dtn- taUi IV. FatttttUt; and, V. GmUmrab. ^ IS. In soonding tbcae eonsonanta, the different parts of the mouth are broogbt into action as follows : With the Labials, the lips are quite or partiaBjr closed ; with tlie Labio-dental% the upper teeth are placed upon the lower lip; with the Lingno-denials, Iho end of the tongue is pfauad against, or nearly against, the base of the upper tooth ; with the Palatah, the toagna Jost back of ibo tip is pressed against the roof of the raoath at a little disunce from the teeih ; and with the Guttur- als, tbe mot or bo^y of the tongno is pressed against the roof of the moub. OBion or im oomosAn^axa. % II. Tbe remarkable brertty that diaUngoishes Phonography from all other ayatema of Sbort-baod, Is chiefly owing to tiie extreme idn- fU^ of the eonennant-eigna U employa ; each being a rimple atnigbl or cnrrod Une, whidi leqnisea but a single motion of tlie pen in ita Connatioti. TIm aonroe ftom which these signs ore derirad is shown la the foOowfng geonwtiic diagrams : e Kzperienoc haa diown that the atialght line can not be idaced in nxae than four positiona, with a anffident diffierenoo to lie icadOy dl» lingiddied, and to prerent mistaking one sign for aaotlier. Tbeae pns>tions are fflnstrated by the fonr diameteia la tbe above diclea. Thi* giTca na fimr diiiinGt straisht rigns; bnt by making use of light SIMrLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. 23 luid hvaxj lines the uumbei is doubled. Again, if the circle is divided into quarters in the two ways shown in the diagiams, eighl distinct curved signs are obtained. Then by making them light and heavy, we haveeight more, making sixteen in all, whichj added to the eight straight signs, make twenty-four^-the greatest number of lineS; straight and curved, that can be used without confusion, and corre- sponding exactly with the number of consonant-sounds (including ch Bud/) that there are in our language. ANALOGY IN THE AFFBOFBIATION OF IHB SIGNS. § 15. In the appropriation of these signs to the consonants, the re- quirements of analogy are strictly observed, the eight inflexible and explosive sounds called dbrupls being represented by unyielding straight lines, while the more flowing and pliable sounds, as the conlinuants, nasals, etc., are rejiresented by curved and flowing lines. § 10. The signs of the compound consonants, chay and /ay, take the form of their first elements fee and dee, and the direction of the second, ish and zhee. UNDUONIC ASSISTANCE IN LEARNING THE PHONOGRAFUS. § 17. The memory is often greatly aided by local association, and the learner'will derive assistance in memorizing the phonographs and their names by studying the table in connection with the following diagrams, in the first of whicli is shown the position and direction of each straight consonant-sign, and in the second, the location, in the 4 circumference of the circle, of each eurved consonant-sign. The names of the heavy or shaded signs are in fall faue type. tee pee chay kay • gay jay.- dee § 18. Single bbnsonant-signs are sometimes called demi aa veil al 84 THK (XUtPUCTK rBOHltOBAPOKB. OF THE MANNER OF WRITING TIIE CONSO NANT SIGNS. f 18. With ooe ezM|ilion (rw), orery ooiuonaQt-sign eniiloyed In Pbooagnqiby ii wrinoi in tbc direction of the fociu of uiio of the linet of ihe fottowinc diagram : 4 2S. Barimtd leUcn are written fh>m lofl to right. § 31. Perpeodkidar and indlned lotton aro writton duwDwwd BZCXPnoxB. {^ SS. (a) Whoi not Jolnod to another stem, ^ (rt) b writton down- •aid, and f~ (I) npwud ; bat when either ia lo Joined It is sometimes wiltten upward and sometimes downward, (i) The straight sign for r, ^fm, b always written vpwaid. § SS. WiMB written ihmanrd, _) and f are callod rospeotlrely ataadit; wbonqtaar^tka andlM. Rules by which the learner ma; dalonalBo whether to me U or lAo, 4 or Iw, (r or rte, will be given Iwfaancr. OUAT Am RSI DISTUIOCISinEO. § SI. As the stems liu^ and m aro iDcUnod In the same direction, lliejr arc dlstingnisbed, when not joined to other slcms, by diflbrenca ia iadination ; etqr being written at aa angle of mat^ degrees from ibs line,and matanangleoflUr(|rd^reos: thus, / cAoy, ^ rw. When ioined to other stems, they are distinguished by the direction of the stroke, which is apparent : thus, S/ fturu, N ptt^ag, ^ dtey-rtt, /f nt*V- nurts ID THs BUmsa. § 26. FhoDogn^yis beat written on niled paper ; and tome reroin- mend doable lines, bat the ordinary dngle-Une rnUng is generally fi> fared by piacticsl j^uMH^npliras. The lewner sboold aoeislost hiinadf to write with eitha pen or poicil, holding It the same as la writing long-baad. The poi should hATe • amaoth aad tolersbly fine pttet, and may. be eiUicr gi^ steel, or qnilL Very fine hair lines an foond in pncUoe not to be the most lei^ble, espechJlr when read- MANNER OF WKXTING THE CONSONANT-SIQNS. 25 mg or transcribing nErtes at niglit. If a pencil is used, Faber'a No. 3 is of about the right hardness. § 26. No effort should be nsiade by the learner at the outset to writB with rapidity. Accuracy alone should be aimed at ; and when his hand has become accustomed to trace the phonographic characters with correctness and elegance, he will find no difficulty in writing them quickly. But if he let his anxiety to write fast overcome his resolu- tion to write well-, he will not only be longer in attaining real swift- ness, but will always have to lament the illegibility of his writing. Each phonograph should be drawn slowly, great care being taken to give it its proper direction, shading, and length. Beginners are apt to give the curved signs a little twist or fiotmsk at the end, and also'^to irkcline the perpendicular stems a little to the r)ght,^defects that should ha carefully avoided. The reading and writing exercises near the end of the book will afford ample practice upon every principle of Phonog- raphy, and, as far as practicable, in the exact order, section by sec- tion, of their presentation in the following pages. Those exercises " have been carefully selected, so that no word will be found which in- volves princip!es,not previously explained. Th«!y should be carefully andrrepeatedly read and writteii, in connection with the sections wHich relate to them. The learner should also scrupulously avoid writing any words except those that he finds in the exercises," or even writing words that are ■there given, but which are in advance of Ms regular lesson. By so doing he will save himselif much unnecessary discouragement, and escape the annoyance of having afterward to unlearn, or forget, im- proper word-forms. LEKGTH 01" PHON06KAPHS. ^27. The. usual length of phonographs prevailing among practical reporters is about one sixth of an inch, or, for example, about like tee, /cay, (^ ef, j zee, ^ ing. Some phonographers write a little smaller, and some larger. Learners should at first write quite large ; but after considerable proficiency is attained the stems may, with advantage, be reduced to the size of the above illustrations. SDADINa OF THE HEAVY SIGNS, ETC ^ 28. In making the heavy curved signs, care should he taken not to shade tliem at or near the end ; they should be shaded in the middle only, a^d taper off toward each extremity, otherwise they will present a clumsy appearance. ^ And both straight and curved heavy signj should onIy.be shaded sufficiently to distinguish them from tho corni- ■sponding light signs. If there bejoo great a contrast between the heavy aiid light lines, the wiiting will appear stiff andungrace- (ul The distance from point to point of ^iny curved sign- should H aO TBS OOMPLKTB raOHOOBArUKK. ■mnit equal to ths kngUi of • atnight dgn wilttea in Ui* mia« dlrac tiou. PBOXOOBAPBia WBta. § 29. The npidityof pfaoaognphie wiittaig, Uk« th»t of Uw ouiumoa Kt^it, moit varf with the aigaiiiam of th« writer. Expert phonogi*- phen generally write about six times aa £ut la Phonosraphjr as la (Lg-hand. txtmeam lo as biia as wsu as wBimii. $ 30. It wiU giaatljr IhcQItatethe aoqalmttent of Phonogmpby if lli «tcfd*os written bj Uw kamar an oamfttDy raad and ro-read by Uio OMtfl they can be ded^ered without hesitadon. Tho oontoquenooe of omiadoa fat this reject are admirably statud by Mr. Diukont In the Wih chapter of " David Ooj^oifield," which may lie rood with both tiMtmctloa and amnsement SIAIPLE VOWELS, oinainoa. ^ SI. A vowel maf be defined to be tho smooth or harmonioiM wmliioM of sounding breath, modulated but not obstructed by the or* (ana of speech ; aa the sounds of a in arm, o in al«, as in «a2. KGimaa or rowst^iotrxos. ) 3X. In the English laogoago there are twelve the dots and dashes are wiltten near a tee, to show the three vowel-positions in connection with a 88 TBS OOXnJCTB raoaooBAFBKB. down-clndu item ; and nair a dotted Iw, to show the podtiOM la oaBiMctian irith an iip«irok« cton. Tbo dottod lines of oooiae foim no part of the Toird-aigii. TOCiJUZAXION OF SmOLE 00NS0NAMT-STEM8. ^41. When • Towel occurs before a consonant, the rowol-dgn is writ- ten to the fr/l of the oontonaot-sicn, if it is nprii^t or slanting; and mhove if it is horiiontal ; thus, •( tud, ..|.. tat, \ M, / ttek, \ 17, j^ai, _i_ odu, _i_ oak. When a Towel comes oiVer a consonant, the Tow«l-sign is wriuen to the right of the oonsonant-sign, if it is npright or slanting ; and &e/«w if it is horisontal ; thus, ..!„. in & llils diangie occasions the difbrenoe ia Iho sound of the syllable law heard in the wotA iipunaiii. aa usually DIPHTHONGS. 3j pionotuiced in this country, and in the word rnxfadunt, of which out pronunciation does not vary from the English. 7he close quality and almost imperceptible quantity of the e sound of the diphthong, as heard in the last example, and in the final syllaWes of the words niibiTe,featwre; virtue, etc., has led may to suppose that the real sound was that of the consonant y, which is a sound so nearly allied to it that it has some times heen called the "squeezed sound of ,«." And even now thi is the pronunciation given in most dictionaries, and also the ono adopted by the American phoneticians. But the phoneticians of England, in their later publications, invariably treat this double sound as a diphthong, — that, is, as composed of two vowels, instead of a consonant and a vowel. On the other hand, however, they err in giving the sound of i in it as its first element, that vowel sel- dom, if ever, entering into the composition of this diphthong, espe- cially as heard in their own pronunciation. § 52. The final element of this diphthong is a,lso subject, under cer- tain circumstances, to a slight change. In accented syllables, it is clearly the long sound of oo; as in the words dut^, heaiAy, revieio, etc. ; but in unaccented syllables, it seems to be the short sound of oo, as in the words valtte, virtue, etc. § 53. From the above observations it appears that, according to the American pronunciation, as a general rule, when the diphthong « oc- curs in an accented syllable, its components are the sounds of i in n and 00 iafood, aifd that in tmaccented syllables, it is composed of the vowel-sounds of ea in eat and oo in ioof. § 54. The four proper diphthongs are represented by four angular chairacters, written, like the simple vowel-signs, to the consonant, three occupying the first, and one the third position, as shown in tho following table. * TABLE OF DIPHTHONGS. L- Sound of cd in mle and i in fine. it (t 0!/ " % « oi " haa. n It ongh '< plough tt ohd ''am. I vi 01 "=!. L^ l^ - EW J ,--" " H-jem "vine " « " «m5«. § 55. If the writer should wish to distinguish between what we may call th^ Amefican and English pronunciations of this diphthong, it may be done by making both strokes of the sign light for the former, an by shadihg the first stroke of the sign for the latter, to indicate that th first element is of the hng e quality. But in practice, no confusion will result firom using uniformly the light sign, as, in the common print, we are accustomed to seeing one letter used for both sounds. 33 THB OOMPUmC PHOSOOBAFBEB. DIKSCnOX OV TBB DIPBTaOHO-aiOIia XBTBR OBAXOBB. ( 56. Unlike the lUsh vowel-aigiu, the signs for the diphthongs lire nerer inclined to ewnspond with the direction of the oonsonant-iignB to which thiy ue written ; thus, S, ftjr, "^ »•?*, \ boj/, '■____ eow, TWO TOWELS OOKCDaBlRO. § 67. When two fowels ooeor tt^cether, either before or after a con- sonant, the Towel that is sonnded nearest to the consonant should be written a little nearer it than the others; thus, t|' iota, .^t,.. pai/t*, DIPBTBOKO I JOnCBD TO CONBONAKTS. ^ 68. When contenient, initial diphthong i is joined to the consonant ; dioa, "^ Uta, 1 ^ftd, ^ Jmm. CO.VSOXANT POSITIONS. ^ 59. Each of the consonant-signs is written, with respect to tho line of writing, in three different positions, corresponding with the three vow- el-paailion% and, like them, respecdTdy called ^rsf, tieond, and third, ^ 60. In the following illostnuions, tho dot4in* running under, over, or through the consonant-stem serves to indicate the line of writing. I'OsrrioNs of febpendiculab and inclined stems. ^61. The positions of perpendicular and inclined stems are as follows : FiBST Poarrio«.-T-AboTe the line, one half the length of a (es ; thus, \ pte, ^ mat, j lea, jT gag. Saoovo Foumw. — ^BaHSngontheline; thns,L.,«/',..i„- jmO, .^ ridk. KxcsmoNa. (a) The role as to flnt and Uilid place Towd-atgns may be Tlolatod where ita ofaaenranoe would throw a Towel into an angle, and thui oo- cailon amUgaity> The TooallMUon in .^^^^^^x^^-; it bettor than in ,^;;;^;^j;:r tot nkk-nock. (&) When two simple TDwol-aoanda,ora simple vowel and a diphthong, occur between two oonaonant-atema, and both, aooording to the role, wotdd be wrilton to tbe same oonaonaat, write one to each stem If cottTecient; titns, -z::^- toeing, rAs-duA. Sometimes it is pieffv- aUe ton rite both to the aame stem; thus, -Vi^- pwrib. POSITION OF WORDS. § 71. There are three positions, with respect to the line of writing, ■a which the eccsonant oatUnes of words may lie written. These po- sitions cwreqpond with the tiiree Towd-positions, and, lilie them, are called finl, memd, and tUrd tetpK^vAj. A word is aiign<■" fool, •■^" fed, ^^-coop, y-y Mr^, me, -V^;. iusku. MENTAL AMD MANUAL PROCESS IN WEHINO PHONOGBAPHT. § 73. Before commencing to write a word, phonographically, the miter must determine what are its consonant-sounds, and also its ac- cented vowel. Then its consonant outline is written in the proper word-position, as directed at §§ 71 and 72 ; and lastly, the vowel-signs are written to the consonant-stems in accordance with §§ 41 and 70. Bufc, as the beginner will find it difficult to carry the consonant outline of a lon^ word in his memory while his attention is directed to ascertaining the accented vowel and its position, it will be well for him, in his early practice, first to write the outline without regard to position, and then, when he has determined. what is its accented vowel, to rewrite it in its proper position. PHOITOGIIAPHIC ANALTSIS. GENERAL BCLE. § 74. It may be stated, as a general rule, that before the learner is pre- pared to write a word with its proper phonographic signs, he must first analyze it into its elementary sounds, observing to carefully distinguish (he consonants from the vowels. § 75. If the common orthography of our language were phonetic,— ^at IS, if each sound had a letter of its own, which always represented tt wherever it occurred, the student of Phonography would need no other instruction in analysis than the general rule given in the last section. But unfortunately this is not the case. An alphabet of twenty-sii Tetters, three of which f c, q; and x) have no sounds of thell 2* 80 THK OOStFI.ETE FBONOGBAFBER. own, Uios {Hactkally Tedadng the number to twont.T-ihrM, I« coi» pdkd to attempt the senrioe of repraaBnUng lomo .fivljf different and diatinct loands. This dl^arify between the number of sounda and the nombei of dgna to rqiraecnt them, is the aooroe of so many dofeota in oar written language, and has caasod the adopUonof such nn im^ulnr and wUmncal orthography, that the analysis of words into their tme elements, to hio spelling changes to^ correspond with the diange of aound or pronunciation. WOBM ntOSOOXCED AUEB BUI SPmjO) DIVWIIUUITLT. ^ 78. In some cases where a sound is used for the ezpresrion of ser- enl ideas, a difference is made in the common spelling cop«sponding to a dillierenoe in signification ; thns,.aZe, aU; ark, arej aught, oaghi, eto. As sodi words ore aUlce insomid, they are writtenoUlw in Fbonograpfay. CAmoK sEBFBcnxa ch, an, to, axd ko. § 79. The sonnds of cA in Aai, «A in (A<, (A in thigh at thy, and vg in k^, aie not the natural sounds of iiM oomUnations e and A, f and A, and A, and n andy. bat they are dm^ ringle sounds, for which ths oomUnaiioas cA, sA, lA, andVi^ are oouTentional modes of i ijiUMiilli. The leaner most be careful to renreaoit them resDoctivelT with tks PHONOGEAPHIO AHALTSIS. 37 rfgns chay, UTi, iCh or thee, iaad mg, and not to write eit-hap for cA or »/i, tee-hay for tt, or en-^'ay for ng. It sliould also be rioted, that the com- bination ng has two sounds, ^- that of ing, as heard in ging, singer, hanger, axiA that of inggay, in the words linger, hrniger, etc. W AND T AT TEE END OE STIiABias. ^ 80. 'FFand y, at the end of syllables, are never sounded as conso- baii ts. One of the most common errors of beginners is to write the strokes ■ xty and way at the end of such words as gay, day, pay, they, may, way, hiy, toy,buy,ccmi, dew, caw, etc. In each of these words there is but one ionsonant-Bound, and that is initial. In gay, day, they:, etc., the com- pounds ay and ey, which are pronounced alike, have a pure simple vowel-sound, represented by the second-place heavy dot vowel-sign. In hm/, the sound of mj is that of the diphthong oi. In hay, the sound of uy is that of the diphthong i. In cow, cv> has the sound of the diph- thong ow. In dem, the sound of eia is that of the diphthong EW. In eaw, aw has a pure simple vowel-sound which Is represented by the first-place heavy dash vowel-sign. DOUBLE CONSOUANT-SOTINDS RAEE. § 81.. It can not be too clearly understood that in words like pitted', tlabUngj massy, etc.,, there is no ireal reduplication of the sounds t, b, and «, respectively. The reduplication of the consonant is a conventional mode of expressing in the common orthography the shortness of the vowel preceding, an expedient which would be entirely unnecessary if each sound had a letter of its o^n, as is the case in Phonography. § 82. Real reduplications of consonant-sounds are extremely rare, la, English they occur only in compound and derived words, where the original root either begins with the same consonant-sound as the final one of the prefix, or ends, with the same that commences the ■ suffix. § 83. In the following words yre have true specimens of doubled consonant=souuds. Say is doubled in book-case ; en, in unnatural, unneces- sary, etc.' ; em-m immortal, immaterial, etc. § 84. A consonant-sound can never be reduplicated in the same pliable ;- hence, in Phonography, a single sign should be used to rep- resent all such double letters as are found in the Ti70rds fagged, whipped; 'M,fuss, whins, off, planned, programme, call, burr, etc. DISPAEEOr EI KUMBEE BETWEEN ISTTEBS ASD SOUNDS. § 85. Another source of confusion is the frequent use of a larger num- ber of letters tiian there are sounds in a word. Thus, the word fhsugh has ^x litters and but two sounds ; through, seven letters and but three 88 THS OOMFUCTK FBOHOOKAPaXB. ■onadi; mom, five lettam and tlu««aoanda{ d^, doy, Nid a Iai|« noiih t«r of Hmilar in»d^ time letten and two aoanda. O, Q, AJIS X. ) 88. The letten e, q, and z of the old elphabet, hare no souadi of their own. Cwmiide like i in em, Uke * In oeU, like < k. «h^!oi, and UIm tk In eamrmtioL <) alwaja haa the eonnd of i; and x soondi lUu t»tntantK,lQ»gtiatmt,»adliVio MinXmuphon. These Iettei», of iiHme, hare nothing ooncqMnding to them ta Phonographji exoo]> that each of thdr diflbrout aoonds lias its impropriate dgn, — e, in ita dif lerent naes, being repreaented by either Jhiy, «m, lee, or M; ; bj fay, and * by fcy t, y y — , or tm. a BiKaa tub aonxoa or kat awd oat. § 87. Before the aoands of Aqr and gojf, n haa generally the lound of nyinsteadof ot; aalBMiiiiiMe, dutuii^ (iiififVuiiA, oiyuiiA, etc. Iti proper a^ in codi caaca is itig. taxn umas oimTED. § 88. All silent letters, nch as 6 In did, e in smm, eft in draehm, h In iatr, k in Anow, ate., are, of oonne, omitted in Phonography, ai ilgni are provUed only fat the aonnds aotnally hoard. § 89. It Is not nnf^oently the ease that a letter is sounded In oei^ tola worda, whUa in othen of similar orthography it is silent ; thns, 1 la annnded la Udk, HOe, tBt, eta, bat silent in balk, talk, ehaUe, eta nxAi ■ OBnauoLT smarr. ^ 90. At the end of* laige daas of words the letter t Is silent, being (daoed then simply as a oonTentlonol mode of indicating that the preced-^ tng Towd haa its hmg sonnd ; as in the words /ate, mUe, ripi, tone, tune The final e in these words represents no rowel-sotind, its only office being to infiarm the reader that the preceding vowel is long, for by dnqipinK this final letter, wc have the words /at, met, ry, ton, tun. *BW' mat USED A>TKK B. I 91. The diphthong ew is nerer heard after the consonant r. In the eariy editions of Webster's Dictionary the Towel « in sncb words as rade, rule is mailced as if it were pronounced like « in tube ; bat in later editions this sound is conndered as tiiat of iw in food. Woroeste( also says, "When ■ is preceded by r in the same i^liaUe, it has the sound of OS inyboJL" Dr. Bnaadl,die eloeationist,says, "The Towelii,imme- dialdy pieoeded by the letter r, takes properly the sound of oo in rood, or of eo in reo{,"ginng as examples die words rate, r%de,fnAt, true, eta PHONOGEAPHIC ANALYSIS. ' 39 Walker also gives the same pronunciation. If therefore follows that the proper sign for the sound of « after r is the third-place heavy dash, and not the diphthong sign iw; thus, write -y^--, and not —/\-, for the word rude. UNACCENTED VOWELS. GENEKAX WnjE. § 92. It Is often dif&cult to determine satisfactorily the quality and ijnantity of vowel-sounds in unaccented syllables. That the learner toay not be without some guide in thia respect, it may be stated that In a majority of cases, when the precise qwMy, can not be readily de- termined, the vowel should be regarded as the short sound of the letter used to represent it in the common spelling ; thus, again, Imable, mental, mdal, travel, refer, prefer, peruse, receipt, reform, peril, idol. And, gen- erally, when the quality is clear, but the quantity is in dOubt, the short vowel is preferred to the long ; thus, e represents better than a, the sound of ai in certain, captain. EXCEPTIONS. § 93. Sometimes, however, unaccented vowels retain their proper long sound, and should be so written ; as a in the final syllable -afe, in cairbonaiey sulphate, vacate, mandate, etc. ; o in obey ; g in re-seai, re-form (to form again), etow And some writers always regard these obscure sounds as long, in quantity and quality, except in cases where they clearly appear to be short ; thus, they would write again, tenable, refer, etc. ; bat mmtail, metal, etc. PHONOGRAPHIC SPELLING. § 94 Although in Phonography there is, strictly speaking, no such thing as spdling, in_ the usual sense of the term, yet there is a process of analyzing words into their elements, and pronouncing the names at those elements, very analogous to spelling, and which the learner will find to be an excellent practice for the purpose of training his ear and judgment to habits of accuracy and quickness in the discernment of sounds. In this phonographic spelling, the consonants should first be analyzed and named, afterward the vowels, then the consonants and vowels in the order that they are spoken, and lastly, the complete word should be pronouiieed. An illustration of this process may be had by pronouncing- the ifollowing words and syllables : ought, tee, aw, aw-tee, ought ; awn, en, o, O-en, own; me, em, e, em-e, me; take, tee, leay, a, tee-a-hay, take; orb, er, bee, av>,,aw-er-l'ee, orb; eBiow,lee,iee,e,d,e-leeiee-o tlbow The words and syllables separated by conmiaB should be spoken deliberately, with considerable pause between, while those connected bj hyphens are to be pronounced in rapid succession, with little orrio pausa 40 THS OOXFLKTB PBOHOOBAFHSB. JSSS AND ZEE CmCLK 4 96. Tbe « and < aie oonaonant elementi of sudi freqaent reour- itnoe, ihat it has been found oonTHiiaat to foinlih thorn with aa ad- ditional and briefer means of leprtaentation. TheyUioTitaiifonniart ^Tcn in tlie Thble of Consonants ; the other farm is a small drde ; thus, e «■• a«- ^ 96. The circle Is extremely useful because it afibrds great llMdlit) tit Joining tlie oonsonant-rtwna, and also because it compresMS tiM trriiing into smaller qpaoe, thus tending to presonre Its llneaUty. XAJIB OF THB B-CIBCLB. ^ 97. Tbe «-dreIe, when not named in conjunction with a itroke^ion- sonant, is called tircU-tti. In this way a distinction ia secured between iu name and that isoNAirMrciiii. § 08. The circle is Joined to oonsonant-stems os follows : L To ringle straight stems, bj a motion from the right over to the toft; thus, (t_» aJqr^ [ »4»-», \ s^wm. IL To simple cnrred stems, by writing it on the inside of the curve ■ thus, J »4i^ C »*H 5 »«M, «-k«-«m-«, ,_, #-«»-•, (^ t-liM. KAJUES or TBB KSS-CIBOLB COUPODNDS. ^ 09. These eompoonds may be named by inserting the short vowel- sound ( between the sounds rq>resented by the circle and the stem to which the circle is attadied; thus, s-pee is called ttpi pee-s, peui s-pee-s, mp$ or tput; s^iee, sei; bee-s, beu; s-tee, uf, tee-s, ttu; s-te»«, «(« or turn; s-dee, secf; dee.s, deui s-dee-s, udi; s-chay, secA; diay-e, cAen ; s.cfaay-s, scAcm or sec Am; s-lcay,seX;; Tuj^,keu; s-1cay-s,aeborsic»; •-glLj,teg; gay-s,yith,wfA; ith-s, -^ ness-an, ^~\__ mess-vee, VI. Between two curved stems that form an angle at their jimction, and, that are arcs of circles struck in opposite directions, — by turning U oil the outer side of the angle ; thus, L^ f ess-lee, ^ thess-lee, ^^^ ■ SHORT RrLE. $ l04. All of the examples given in the last section, of the ciwlc m TUB COVnXT% rHOHdOBAfnEB. ""^ifag betweoa ttemi, exoeftt a few under beads lH. and LV., an co*«red hj Um foOowing nde : When the drcle ocean between two ■lems of any kind. U there be no angle at thdi jancUon, it h written to the fint stem ae if it atood alone ;— if there )m an angle between tlie stema, the aide is written on the outer side of the angle. VOCAUZATIOK OF STEMS WITH CIRCLES ATTACHED. OBDHi or WKiniia. § lOB. When a rowel immediately prooodes a consonant^tem thai as an Initial dide, w immediately follows a oonsonant-stem that has a flnaldrde, the Towel-dgn is written to the stem as if it had nodide attadied; thus, •■^.•mtl taA-l.lmu an TOoallMd the same as -l-tol aBd..|_.ta. OBOIB or aKASDiO. § 106. In readfaig words in whldi drdes are used, an initial drola is read Snt ; then the rowd-aign. if one preoede the stem ; thirdly, the Stan ; then its following vowd-«lgn, If there bo one ; and lastly, a Anal drds ; thus, 54 ntf p o m . OAimmi. —Tim cibclb totxsD to m-mnoat snto. § 107. With np.«iioke stems, an inlUal drdo will, of oonrse, be at tiM bottom, and a final drdo at the top ; thus, '(~ lale, taU; /0> lae$, VOCAUZATIOX WHEN THE CIRCLE OCCURS IN THE MIDDLE OF A WORD. §108. When a drde oocun betworai two oonsonant-stoms, if a rowel tmmedlatdy precede the drde, — write Its sign to the first stem ; thus, |_ aUt; — Irat if tlie rowd immediately fi>Uow the drde, — write its •ign to the second stem ; thos, ^^{^ low/e. § 109. The rule at § 70 as to rvwels^signs between stems, does not iffij to these outlines. osis or TBI otaeiM. § 110. The-drde is generally used at the oonunenoement of words that begin with the oMonnd ; at the end of words that terminate with an Of or aoe sound, and for the sounds e$$ and aw wh«n ^ey oocnt ')» tlie middle of words; thus.„. take, \ $oap, -f laii, —eeaie, [,- da^ C^mnm, ^ ^att, and the words deA and mua/e in § 108. ( 111. When aa en or aae sound is immedUdy proooded, or lmm» THE XAEGE CrECIiE. 43 diatcly followfi-d, by two concurrent vowels, the stem-sign should be ased, as it furnishes moie conyeuient facilities for vocalization ; thus, l^ science, "^ cJiaos. § 112. When two ess-sounds are the only consonants in a word, one should be written with the circle, and the other with the stem-sign. But, as the circle may be joined to either end of the stem, we have two forms, ^ and ^, which are equivalent to each other. The first of these forms should be used in words where the sound of ess is final, — that is, where no vowel is sounded after both the consonants ; thus. A- cease ; — and the second form, in words that end with a vowel thus, °), saucy, .°)-. azsy. There is a third form, °\, that is generally used in words where the second of the two consonants is a lae-soUnd ; thus, "} sm. ■WBSS THE STEU-SIGN SHOULD HE USED INSTEAD OF THE CIBCia. § 113. The stran-sign should be used when the ess-sound is the first consonant in a word that commences with a vowel ; thus, ') ask. § 114. The stem-sign for the sound of zee is always used when that sound is the first consonant in a word, whether there be an initial vowel or not ; thus. v^^. oozing, -■)^- zero. § 113. The stem-sign is also used when the sound of ess or zee is the last consonant in a word that ends with a vowel; thus, X) Baceyj, raey;: X) rosy; — also when either of those sounds is the only conso- nant in a word; thus, •) me, )• say, •)■ essay, ■) oj/es. THE XAEGE CIRCLE. § 116. When the sound of ess or zee occurs twice in a word, with no other consonant between, or when the sounds of ess and zee occur in like proximity, the two sounds are generally represented by making the circle twice the size of the single ess- circle ; thus, n ess or zee, q est- ess, or see-zee, or ess-zee, or zee-ess. NAUE AKS USE OF TEE LABQE OIECLE. § 117. The large circle maybe called sis or s&. It is commonly use«l to represent any of the combinations ses, m, ces, ds, nas, sos, sm, etc., f the common spelling. I9E LABQE CIKCLE JOINED TO CONSONANT-STEHS. § 118. The large circle is joined to consonant-stems precisely in the game manner f i the small circle, and such combinations are named io 44 TOB OOICFLKIS PnOiHOOBAFHBB. KiBuinerdmilartoUistdMcilbedfn$99; thai, a_ lii-fay. _o *<■<■*, {^fimk, —^ iMM-nt ,-— and alw, Uk« the BmiOl dnda, may be uwl clUier at tha Ixciiming, in th« middle, or at the end of a wotd; tl'U, -^ayrina, ^ nMnily, _d ««»• TOCAUZJk.TIOK OF STEJIS WITH TOE LABQE CUtOLB ATTACHED. § 110. The nda at ^ 105, 108, in referenoe to the Tooaiintlai r etemt that hare the smaU dide attached, alao appUei in TOoallilB^ atems with the laige circle attached. TOOAUBAnoH or nil LJMa oibclb. § 110. When ncctaaary, a Towel that ocoun between tha two loundi rcpreaented bj the huge dide, may be oxpreasod by wrlUag iU itgn inalde the dide, and, if conreDlent, in the unptr, middit, or loutr part of the drcla, aoooiding aa the vowel ti JM, aaaemf, or Oiird plaoe ; thus. ■■^- MOda, jm; a ri i aa, ...p.. Meodi, oia Btrnm, -L. dtotoM, ^ rtMU ■a Axv na aoona Dimiiainnuu). f 121. When groat euctnoM is requiied, the largo drde may be ahadad a Utile on one aide to indicate that both of ita Round* are tha* nfaM; thoa, J^ tmti, instead of ^ ra«a. LOOPS FOB ST OB ZO, AUD STB. SMAU utm.—n oa en. § 123. When the oonsonant-aound Ite immediately follows mi (aa in the words wud, eat, etc), or, when iei follows sm (as in the words ■sHaai; rmmi, ete.), the two aonnds are repreMuted by lengthening the drde into a small loop, extending about one third the length of the stem; thns, ._ i(-iay, -fay-it,. ^^Ukay-it. LAxaa loOP, — BIS. § 123. A large loop, extending about two thirds the length of the atem, may be naed to l epi ea e nt the aonnd of sfr; with any vowel-sound that ocean between the ( and the r (as in the words nmUr, eador, ets.) ; ihos, _^ tay-tti^. RAns or :b> umfs. — TocAuaanoa or szois wm uiors atmohso. § 124. When not sounded in conjunction wiUi a stroke-consonant, the anall loop jbbj be called Utt; and tiie large lo(q> may lovaiiably be called a(rr. When the loopsare Joined to consonant-stems, the com- KTJLES FOa . THE USE OF ISH, SHEE, EL, tEE, ETC. 45 binatious may be named in a manner Bimilar to that gi^en for the eta- circle compounds at § 99; thus, st-kay, stek; kay-st, kest; st-kayst, ttekesl; kay-str, hester; em-str, Tnester, etc. § 125. The rule at §§ 105, 108 also applies to the vocalization of stems with loops attached. The small loop, like the circle, may be used both at the beginning, in the,iniddle, and at the end of words ; thus, • f stale, \j^ destiny, [• taste, ^~" casi, C lost. The large loop is not -jised fit the commencement of words, but may be in the middle and at th Kid ; thus, L disturb, ^ castor, ^ master. SHALL LOOP SHASSD lOB ZS. § 126. If great accuracy be reqmred, the small loop may be shaded when it represents the soimds zee-die ; thus, ^ raised, instead of ^ raced. IHE SMALL CIKOLE ADDED TO SIS, ST, AND STB. § 127. The small circle is added to the large circle and to the loops by turning it on the opposite side of the stem ; thus, _^ excesses, -^ coasts, ..^ coasters. UULES FOR THE USE OP ISH, SHEE, EL, LEE, ER, AND REE. § 128. In order to secure among phonographers a uniform manner of writing, and to give increased legibility to certain words, the following rules are prescribed regulating the use of those signs that may be written either upward or downward. ITiese rules are general in their application, covering nearly, all the words in which those stems Bccur. They may, however, be violated in tt few cases, where th§ir ■>baervance would occasion difficult or awkward forms. USES OF isn. § 129. The consonant-stem _^ is written downward (being then called ish) to. the following cases : I. 'When it is the only consonantTStem in a word ; thus, p)- sJie, J? _ msh. II. When it is the first consonant-stem of a word that commences with a Vowel ; thus, .5^. Ashby. HI. ■When it is the final element of a word ; thus, ■^" Jaei. TJS3SS OF SHEE. ^ 130. The consonant-stem _J is written upward (being th?n called 46 Tax ooxFLxn PHOirooxAJpmn. il«) whaa it fa Um laat Btam of » word tho flnd dornont at wUeh BRom mi OK BiiKa. (ISL AttheoommenoemeDtaadinOiomiddleof «oitl8,eItliorUoi ai« may b« med ; ihu. ..j^' or ^ tksp, J^ or jT" *M», ~'^"' or 'N^V KAqp; —M, howerer, fagMumllymoro convenient in RDoh onaaii (MB or BL. ^ ISt. Ibe oomonant-cleni ^ fa written downward (iMing tlion called <0 in the following caaee : L When it it the ibat cMisonantHitem In a word that oommenoet with a Towel, and ii next followed by a horteontal item ; thna, CI. aUke, <£. «6«. (^ um or iMM. ^ ISS. The comoDaat^lcm ^ is written upward (being then called l«r) In the following ouea : L When it U the only oonionant^tcm in n word ; thui , '(^ ale, aS, ^ toar, sore, '^ store. , m. Always for r, before the stems em and hay, whether an initial vowel precede it or not ; thtts, ^~V^ arm, "S— n Some, roam, TVs re- hash, USKS OF BXE. § 186. The np-stroke stem / ree is used in the following cases . I. When r commences a word ; thus, /%] road, /\ rope, Xj riui F(.>r exceptions, see § 185, heading HI. II. When T is the last consonant-sound of a word the final element of which is a vowel ; thus, \y- lerry, Vf" sorroj), ^- iHary. ni Always for r, before the stems j«A, dto, elay, and jay, whether it ia preceded by an initial vowel or not ; .thus, yi^ earOi, /\ wraOi, •// arch. EITHEB ES OB BEE. § 137. In the middle of words, either a or ree may be used ; but ree is generally preferred, being more convenient. GROUP COE"SONANTS AND THEIR SIGNS. § 138. If the learner has carefully studied and mastered the princi- ples thus far explained, he has acquired the means of writing phono- grapKicaUy, and with tolerable brevity, any word in the language But there yet remains unemployed much stenographic material, with- out which no system of short-hand can justly claim to be complete. If we were obliged to write all the consonants with their full stem- signs, there are many words ia which they are so grouped together and pronounced with such rapidity that the pen would find it difScult, if nof impossible, to keep pace with the tongue. To obviate this difficulty, Phonography adopts the very natural plan of modifying the simple stem of some one of the consonants to provide a sign for the entire group. There are four diflferent ways of modifying or altering simple stems into group^gns, namely : 1. By an initial hook ; 2. By a fina iiook ; 3. By lengthening ; and 4. By. halving. INITIAL HOOKS. THE LIQUIDS £ AHI) B. § 139. The liquids I and r, in a large number of words, are fouu. buibediately follo'wing other consonants, and blending with them so as to fonn double consonant-sounds somewhat analogous to the double t8 nut OUKPLSnC FBOHOaBAPHXB. T JcxiHiouBdi or JiphUmBgi. Hius, in th«wordiciqr,Xiy, fnV,/>^, Iba fint omaonaDtor eadk of the oombinAtiona el,Jl,gr,fr, gUdm n quicUj and imiiera^tildy Into the Moond, or liquid, that the two Meni to become aetnaDy one aoond. In Phonc^raphj, such oompoondi aro icpitacated hf the atam of the oonaonont that prooodea the liquid, modified if an initial hook. THE EL-HOOKS. 4 ItO. A mall book at the beginning and on the circle dde of ony 'traight atem, and a Urge book at the beginning and on the conon>« aide of any cnrred alem, indlcatea that snch oonaonant la Inunedlntdy followed hr the Uqatdi; thoa, Stkuobt iTeiia: \ i»a»^, \ b$»4, f lee-/, f A*-/, / ekajf-f, / JafJ, _ taf-i, <;— ^JF-4 y rt*-l. Ccnrso arena : ^ -f-s *<»*■»•• 4 14S. These hooka tor I and r being initial, will of conrie, when jobied to ^ or _J, be at the top or bottom, according as the stem is written downward or upward. ^ I4S. The aigu ikee and el, with the e/ or cr hook, should never be osed escept in connection with other stem-rign* (see ^^ 22, 129, L, and ISS,!.). sahes of tkb el xsd bb book coinnvATioxa. § 144. Hie doable eonsonant-aigna of the el and er hook series should not be called pee-e^ pee-er, bee-el, bee-er, etc., but by names formed, like thoee of the eo-drde compounds, by inserting tbtf riiort vowel I be- tween the two consonanlpsoouda repreaented by the sign ; thus, pd, per. GEOUP CONSOJSTAUTS AND TilEIE SIGNS. 49 bel, h&r^fel,fer, vel, ver. The hook-signs formed with the stems ess, zee, ish, shee, lee, el, er, ree, ing are named respectively es'l, es'r, zeel, zeer, ish'l, ish'r, alieel, sheer, leel, leer, el'l, err,reel, reer, ing'l, ing'r. CADHON. § 115. The d and er hooks, though made at the leginmng of the stem signs, are not ' read before hut. after them. The learner, therefsre should be very careful not to confound such signS as ^ W, ^ Iter etc., with { lee-Hay, / ree-kay, etc. UNEUOmC ASSISTANCE IN LEABNINa THE EL AND EB. HOOE-SIDNS. § 146. The following diagrams will assist the learner in remembering the sides of the d and er hooks on the straight stems. If the left hand, with the first finger bent, be held up and turned in the directions of Icay, pee, tee, and chay, the outlines of hd, pd, td, and did will be farmed ; thus, td n pd kdC And if the right hand be held up and turned in the same way, the outlines of Jeer, per, ter, and cher will be formed ; thus. cher Observe that the Left hand (which word commences with L) is agao- ciated with the e^-hook, and the Eight hand (which commences with R. with the er-hook. VOCALIZATION OF DOUBLE CONSONANT-SIGNS. § 147. The double consonant-signs of the d and er hook series are ypcaUzed the same as if they were simple stemg; thus; -\ode, .] odor, \ pay, \ play. 60 THB OOXPLETE FHONOORAPHBK. oum or BKuiiaa tocaubd doobu ixamiaiAin-mait. j 148. If aTowd be placed to the left of a peipendiooUr or Inalmd doable oonwoaaMgn of the al or - /•<. ->" /«el. ^ Sore. osB or ma bl axo nt uook signs. esoted Towd sqMrating the liquid from the preceding oonsoaont, as in Si. on Bl BOOK Slavs ntxm to voscmwa snois. 4 1S2. An 4 or cr hook dgn may be Joined to a preceding stem withf oat tsising the poi bom the p<4>er; thus, . . i knudklt, "^' buiSty, • \ e^pBT, ' ^ *^RP*^i y^ floor, § 168. Bat when an rf or or hook comes on the outside of a right or an acate angle, formed fay two stnUght stems, and sometimes when it oocon after the en-dide, the hook can not be perfectly formed with- out Interfiling with speed. In such cases, however, a slight offset oi duraldaserres instead of a hook; thus, ^^ryg, V^ /w4 _^ yrl GEOUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 51 SPECIAL VOCALIZATION. , j^ 156. For the sake of obtaining briefer and more convenient out- lines, double consonanfcsigns are occasionally used even where there is a distinct rowetsound between the two consonants they represent. When necessary, such intervening vowel may be represented as fol- lows : I.. PoT-vo'WELS are indicated by a, small circle, written in the three vowel positions and placed before- the double sign for the long vowels, and after it, for the short vowels ; thug, .-1.. dear, f» tell, ..^.^.. till. But when the position of the consonant-signs renders it inconvenient to ob- serve this rule, the circle may be written on either side for a long or a short voWel; thus, ^jr- engineer. II. Dash vowels and diphthongs are struck through the double consonant-sign ; thus, ^^_ coal, ^-h. coarse, .S^... endure. When a Iiook would interfere with the striking of a vowel-sign through the stem, it may be written at the end ; thus, .'."TZ. ca^', ^^~\ empire. TWO rOKMS FOE SL, SH, ZL, ZK. — IHEIR FSE3 AT THE OOMMENCEMEST (II WORDS. § 157. The signs fox I and r with the ess-circle prefixed, and the steina ess and zee with the el and er hooks, give two modes of representing the combinations st, sr, il, and zr; thus, ^ she, "^ see-er, Q sd, ') ser, *) eel, ) zer. According to the rules laid down at §§ 110, 113, and 114, the above forms that have the initial circle should be used in words that begin with the sound of ess; thus, '(~ sail, °>| soar; the forms sd and ser, when aa ess-sound is the first consonant in a word that com- mences with a, vowel ; thus, '£) assail, •) acer ; and the forms zd and eer, when a zee-sound is the first consonant in a word, whether there be an initiad vowel or not; thus, .Q.. easd, .0.. zeal, ^ Mra. THE JSSS-CIKOLE PREFIXED 10 THE EL AND EB HOOK SIGNS. § 158. The ess-circle may he prefixed to all the cJ-hook signs, and to the curved ef-iiiook. signs, both at the commencement and in the middle of words, by turning it on the inside of the hook ; thus, a_ sid, \ spd, ($_ sfd, Q ahd, ^ serl, (^-^ smd, c^ snd, (^ sfh-, ^ _^ ewsjrr, g-, smer. § 159.^ A loop, or large circle is never prefixed to any of the c^hook ^jgnSjipi; to an'er-hook sign on curves, 59 tme ooxFum PBOVoaiuPBKB. VM cncui An> ar uxw rumxat to tin aimAiOHT n-BOOK nam. § ICOl Tbe two didaiand tba tl luop am pnaxcd to Um itnlgU -hook aide of the sterna, or, in othoi wxda, by making the hook into a smali drdle, a large dide, or a loop, aa the case may he ; thna, N J"*". "\ V*". *\«**i»<»"i N • (hem the same as to flie kd signs. Kx*«Fi«: C' Mee, ^-~\ atpin, ■^■■■■~- gmdc, 'r^ iquaw, /^r^ tgue* THE TAT HOOK. §167. For stenognpUcieaaoaa, the consonantal^ is espreanAlija bise hook on tho (T^hook aide of tho staaight stems; tlias, e- *W» GBOUP CONSONANTS A1,D THEIK SIGNS. 53 1 tet-y, ^ hee-y. The use of this hook will be fully explained here- after, it heing Eeldom employed, except ia phrase writing. HOOK SOB, WS, IfT, OE UN. § 168. The syllables en, in, and un may be prefixed to the straight treble signs of the '^ sper series," by turning a small backward hook on the cZ-hook side of the stem ; and to curved stems with initial circles, by turning a similar hook on the outside of the curve ; thus, v \ in- szribe, \^ unstrung, ,(\__ enslave. ■SKlVa AXD USE OF IKE IHIIIAL EN-HOOK. § 169. This hook may be called either the in, en, or un hoqk, accord- ing to which of those syllables it represents. It is iised before any straight stem of the " sper series," and before any curved stem that is tLo arc of a circle struck in the direction opposite to that of the stem en. FINAT. HOOKS. EF AND VEE HOOKS. § 170. ^or ves may be added to any straight stem (whether it be simple, or hare an initial hook, circle, or loop) by a small final hook on the drcle side ; thus, ^hay-foTv, [ tee-f or v, / c/idy-foTv,\^ let-fai V, ,_3 ger-f or v, g_^ sek-f or », \^ 4%/ or v. ITAUES OF THE EF-EOOE COMPOUNDS. § 171. These compounds may be named respectively kef, Itf, eh^, htf, gref, skef, sC^fief. VOICAUZAHOlf. — EUtE FOR WBHINQ. § 172. When a vowel occurs between the consonant represented by the stem-sigpa and the ef or vee indicated by the hook, the vowel-sign is written to the stem as if no hook were afSxed ; thus, X pay,\^ pat*. BULE FOB BEMJIKO. § 173. A vowel-sign written to a stem that has an ef or vee hook, Is sJways read before the hook ; thus, [■ deaf, __^ cave. "EB ASD VEB SISCINGTIISHED. § 174 When great exactness is required, the hook maybe mai'e heavy for eee; thus, -V — ^ro»e,, instead of ..%^. proof. But generally no conruuon will result from using the light-hook for both ^ and vee. 54 1HB OOMCPIMXB rnOMOOBAFOBII. B Ain> m nooK oh cubw. § 176. A Umg nanow hook nwy bo writtoi to the oonrod steiM for ^orMt ; thus, Q ikf, ^~^mf. This hook should, howerw, be usd toij spaiingrly hf inezpericmoed phonogniihen. It is prindpally oaed by M- parten in phiaae writing. KN HOOK. § 176. Ihe oonsoDiuit « may be joined to mj itnight item ^diethar aimpla, or compounded irith an IiUtial AoeA, ebrtU, or loopY hj a small final hook on the side opposite the <^-hook ; and to any cnrred consonant, by a small final hook on the conoaTe side ; thos, „— taif-n, J tee^ K^tf^ r* *»* XAm or Tin n-nooE uohpounds. § 177. The oi-hook signs ore named in a manner similar to the (^ hook rigns ; thus, the characters in the last section are called respect- iTel)rfan,iai,/ attajit, e^«&oim, ^ vain, ^/bim. maa ax sr or n book sboold kot bi ranm. $ 170. When ^, Mt, or m ia the final oonsonant-sonnd in a word that Mids with a vowel, the stem-sign most be used, because the hook does not famish the reiptisite position fbr the sign of such final rowel ; Ihos, r^^ eoiy*, 1~\-- uffet, ^-agraM, ^^^ gnwy, /t» mm, ,-^ SHDK HOOKS. § 180. The qrllables Am or xkm, as heard in fia(i«i,/iHtoit etc., may be added to any straight stem byalarge final hook on the {T-hook side ; and to any carved stem, by a Irage final hook on the ooncATO side ; Utns, _3 k^-Atm, Vo ^-thm. XAHU or niB BHDX-HOOKOOMVODXDS. § 181. Ihe *faai-hook dgns are named as follows: kay-tbnn is tailed tafam; ef-shun,yi[ifaa>,- dnRhnn, dAun -. iefrshna, lahm ; vay dnm, aia&iBi, etc TOCAT-WATHOr. § 1C2. The ihw-hook aigiis ate Tocalixed the same as the /and m &ook signs: ttns,r:J»eB«*ii»i,^3omBfai,A7:.«ioto»,.jiM«6»i, W«*» ^ 183. If it sboald be neoeaaarr to distingniah'butweoa'slbai aad S';"t'*" GEOUP CONSOIirANTS AND THEIE SIGHS. 55 than, the Uook aiay be thickened for the latter ; thus, (^ eoasion, in stead of j,^ mcUion, which words, in imvocalized phonography, might In rare instances he confounded. § 181. In the common orthography, the two sounds represented by this hcok are indicated by a variety of spelling, as Hon in notion, cean in ocean, ssion in mission, sion mfwion, shim in fashion, dan in logician, sian Id Persian, etc. SHES USED EiSIEAT) OF SHUN. § 185. When ish and en final are the only consonant-sounds in a ord, the sign. ^ shen must he'used ; thus, ^' ocean. Shen should also he used when the only other consonants in the word are repre- sented by an initial small or large circle; thus, ^" session,^' se- cession. § 186. The word ocean, and any similar word, may, however, be vepre- seiited by the sten-hook by joining it to the preceding word ; thus, ""\"""^ Pacific Ocean. SMALL HOOK FOR SHUN — ITS NAME. § 187. The syllable shun or zhun may be added to any stem that has a final circle or loop, by taming a small hook on the hack of the stem ; thus, g hess-shun, (^ f ess-shun, etc. This may be called the ■ ishun- hook. It may be vocalized by writing a first or second place vowel he- fore the hook, and a third-place vowel after it ; thus, :_e accession, --^- physician. But ishun may generally he left imvocalized without endan- gering the legibility of the writing ; thus, ^- cessation. HOOK FOK TR, THE, OR DHR. ^ 188, Tlie compounds tr, thr, and dhr, with any, intervening vowel, may be added to any straight Sgn by a large final hook on the en-hook side; thus, — -, kay-tr, \ tee-tr ; and such combinations are vocalized the same as those of the other final hooks ;. thus, —r:> eater, ~~^ actor, ^■'■ datter, c_; equator, '^"^ gather, Z' rather. NAMES O? THE TR-UOOK AND IIS COMPOUNDS. § 189. Tills hook may be called ter, ther, or dher; and its compounds may be named like those of the ess-circle, or those of the en and e^ hooks ; thus kay-ter or -dher is called TceUer or hedher ; gay-ter or-dher, getter or (rite- ; ree-ter or-dher, reder or rei^Aer, etc. TER AND DEB SISTINaniSnED. ^ 190. This hook is used for tr or dhr, the combination dr being writ- ten with the stem ] der. 56 rax ooxfletb rucnrooBAFiiKK. (TKIIL TOCAUSJinOS Ot IBB UX-IIOOK. 4 181. Whenerer It is neoesEaiy to cxpraa a vowel or dipbthM 4 that oocan between the te and «r sounds roprasented \tf the tovbook. It may be done in aoooidoaoe with the rule for " spedal TooaUwtinn" at § 166, or, if it belong to the third position, by wiitiog it witldn tbt hook: ; tlina, " rsa zr, aaxiti, he, aks ouktio xn hook boxi. ^ 192. The «8(-dicle (bnt not the loopa or lorge drde) may be added to an iT, rtin, or Ur hook, and to an cn-hook on a curved dgn, by writing it iniide the hook ; tbos, _» earn, '_£> oooiubmi, ^ foMm, ^_ aden, V^ waim. cncus Axs noon addcd to im nrRAiom ra-HOOK siom. § 108. All the drclea and loops may be added to the ttiaight «i-hook aigna by simply writing them on the en-hook side, without attempting to show the form of the liook ; thua, X pm, \ jmnt, \ pmutw, J- dbsiM, J- »-9»". — =— *iqr-efar, etc., must not be read icspecttvoty Anf-fay, \aa»ne, pat^m, Um-biy, etc. ta^KoacLt nsBD idb eks. § 196. In the middleof a few words the simple eu-dicle may Minsd for em without eodangeiii^ the legflnliij of the writing, the en b(ii« GEO0P CONSOlTAirTS AKD THEIB SIGNS. 57 omitted from the word ; thus, Xj tran^ose. And, in a few instances, the ess-circle may be so used in connection with a succeeding straiglit sign from which an r-hook is omitted in accordance with § 164 ; thug, 3_i, transgresi. But the ens-circle may sometimes be distinctly written when it can be turned on the back of a succeeding curve ; thus, I_> rna E3S-cikoi^ akd isHra added to the eh-hook cikoles and looh. § 197. The ess-drcle and ishm may be added to the en-hook circles «nd loops by turning them on the opposite side of the stem ; thus, "^ pitnaters, --^- traniatim. THE ESS-CIBCLE ADDED 10 ISHCN. § 198. The ess-circle may be added to ishun by turning it inside the hook ; thus> -U- physmam, -^- iransiiions. FINAL HOOKS USED IN THE MIDDIE OF WORDS. § 199. When more convenient, the final hooks may be used in thu middle of words instead of the stem-signs ; thus, ^ cover, — j^ cunning, sIP national; ^ processional, •^■- transitional. CIRCLE INSIDE OF HOOKS. § 200, When the ess-circle is written inside of the hooks, it may be made a little smaller than usual, and it is not essential that it should be a perfect circle, as there is no danger of its being confused with the loops, which are never so used. LENGTHENING. DOUBLS-LENQIH CURVED SIGNS. ^ 201. Doubling the length of any curved sign adds either ir, dr, thr, or dhr; thus, ^ ^ ea-tr, etc. NAMES OF DOUBLE-IOSINGTH CURVES. § 202. The double-length curved signs, like the fer-hook combina- tions, are named generally by inserting the vowel sound e between the sound of the simple stem and the added consonants or syllable ; thus, ef-tris called /eto-; ei-di,fedda- ;et-dhT,fedher ; em-tr, metier; way-dhr, fiKriAer;hay-tr, Aeffer; en-dr, nedder. But ish-tr, shee-tr, el-tr, lee-tr, Er-tr, and ing-tr are named respectively ishter, sheeter, elter, leeter, ertei; nnd ingter. POSITIONS OF LEKGTHEHED STEUS. § 203. Some phonographic writers indicate any given position of a 68 TOB OOMFUTB raOROOBAPHXB. lengUien«dciirvebyoommenrfngitattIienaiep(rintinTeli>lio& toIlM line of writing that the single length of the aune stem I* commeneed at fiir the same poaition. Bat the foaowing rale is found to gtre greater distinctness and increased legibility to these dgns. roamasB of noanoKTAL amis. § 2M. The positions of horiaontal double-longth coryes ore nooeHii- •Qj the same as (hose of dngle lengths ; thus, Faff rosnsosi : .■^^i7^.'"**'i .^rrTT. »«*»• Sbxhd rosmoii: .;rTrv<"<'*'''i ^ ^_ ing(K: Tbub Foamoii : ■^;,;i^. htUtr, .^^^^. fuller. roamoiis or dowhwabd uwaTiufKBD ottbtb. ^ 205. Ibe positions of dovnTrard double-length curves are ss foUows : Fnsi Posmoir.— The lower end resting on the line ; thus, V •A'fl-, J ithttr. Smuni roamoii.— Divided by the line into two equal parti ; thus, ■( MMtr. Taaat Fosmos.— About two thirds of the sign below the Une ; thus, -k:^/*r, •(•"tteto-. -J^-iikltr. FoerriOia or opwabd UNOioxinED ouavas. § 200. The positions of upward doable-length curves are as follows : Foat Faamai.— Commencing about one third the length of a ta above the line ; thus, f leeler. Saooim Tbannnr. — Oonmneocfng at the line ; thus, j^_ letter. Tbod Posmoat.— Commendng about one tUrd the length g puzzled, ^, named, ^~^ muzzled. SPECIAL EEMAEKS UPON THE HALF-LENGTHS. mPEOEBE jonnHOS. § 221 . A full-length and a half-length stem must not be joined, if one or both be straight, or if both be curved, but are arcs of circles struck in the same direction, except they form an angle at the point of junction ; for instance, hay and ket, lee and ketygfand. ket, etc., are not allowable combinations, because it is difficult to distinguish such signs, on the one hand, from a full-length stem, and on the other hand, from two full-length stems. Thus, fezy-W joined, might be supposed to be £a^ made a little too long, or kay-kay made too short. Li these cases the full- lengt h stems should be used ; thus, write '° [ not .^^ :. for correct, (v I not (^ foT liked, -^— ^ not -L^ tox effect. Snl AFTEH EF OB VEE. § 222. When the combination sU is immediately preceded by ef or vee, it must be represented either by the full-length stems shee-tee, or by the downward half-length UU; thus, /^\-A- laiiished, "^fished. STEAIGHT HAiF-LENGTHS IN SAME DIEECTION KOT AIXOWED. ^ 223. Two straight half-lengths running in the same direction can not of course be joined, because they would appear the same as one fuU- length stem ; thus, | is dee, not ded-ded. To avoid the inconvenience of disjoining in such cases, the &st compound should be written with full-length stems, and the ptlier with a half-leligth, as in the word SnXABlES -TED AND -DED. § 224. The syllables -ted and -ded, terminating adjectives and the perfect participle and preterit of regular verbs, are generally written with the sigtis ted and ded, without regard to the maimer of writing Ihc primitive word; thus, wnt&'~ ad, but I- not "^ for aded; _. j/ijrid, but -p). not "^ ioT goaded. 63 THE OOXFLKTC FHOHOOSAf BKB. luu-uonniB imwonwD. § 225. Sometimes it is nececsaiy to detach a half-length &«m tht fnoeding stem, or else to write its equivaleiit full-length stems ; tliu I- dMad; "^'i. uwbd, \ dnadei. BT StBUOE VPWAAD. ^ 220. Occasionally, when it is difGcult or inconvenient to Join tfat ■If-length oC to a final thai or en hook, it is allowable to strike It up- ward ; thna, ^ '^ fadiomd, •■^\~ damtionut. HSDIAL TOWBL ATttB BALr-LIKOTII. § 227. When a Towel oocors immediately after lt» ot ite added bv halving, if the next sncceeding oonionantHdgn be a circle or loop, there Is no podUon in whidi to write the vowel-sign, and it must be omit- ted ; as the fint ( in ; pale, as distingmsbed from ^ pidds though, genenlly, no amlngnity would arise from writing paid the same as pate, and so with most other words of the same class. GHQUP CONSONANTS AND THEIE SIGNS. 63 HALE-LENGTH LEE FOB LT. § 230. Half-length lee, when standing alone, is used for It, and not for ?i-^as in the words light, late, let, etc. THE STEMS LEE-DEB FOE LD. § 231. In words containing only the consonants Id — as lad, lady, old, C c. — the stem signs lee-dee are used. HALF-LENGTH EEE FOE IlT, ETC. § 232. Half-length ree, when standing alone, is used for rt, and not for rd, the latter being written with the stem-signs ree-dee ; thus,,^ 7-ate, y^ raid. But after another consonant-stem, ree may Be halved to add either a tee or dee sound ; thus, <~^ mart or marred, \^ fired. TWO VOWELS BEFOBE FINAL TEE OR DEE. § 233. When the sound of tee or dee is immediately preceded by two vowels, the stem-sign should be used ; thus, ^ poet. This rule, and the one given at § 232, secures a distinction by outline between such words as < r^ht, ■UBB. GROUP VOWELS AND THEIR SIGNS.— IMPROPER DIPHTHONGS. GEilBULL mniABIfH. ^ 286. At baa been before remarked, there are bat four proper dipb- tbongi reoognlaed in our language. Tbttn dipbthonga and their rignt bATebeenabeadrfallf treated of at page 80 and onward. Weharo, hoverer, manj other doable Towela VbtA do not come itrlctiy within din definition of proper diphthongs, bat which are yet k like them in Ihdr nature, and are of each finqnent ocourrenoe in wordi, that it boi been found oonraiicnt to lepMwnt them in • dmilar manner, and to gire them signt'that nti^ be made with fteiUty and withoat taking off the pen. § 287. These doable aoondt dUfer bom the dot or,ppepar dlphttumgi in hsring a Ie« intimate connection ei their component! ; they nutf, llierefore, be termed apn or imfnpv diphthongs. oOAUsonci Of TBB Dovma towiu. 9 288. The d^ree of inttmacy with which these doable sounds cu* aleaoe Tarics in diflbrent words. Sometimes tliey approach rery nearly to the character of cloae diphthongs, as, far instance, the sounds of a*-l in the word oyt (yes), or e»4 in Leuii, etc. ; while In other words the two ooncurrott vowels are entirely severed, as ■ l-ii, I 1-00 (kw) carry-all, olio, duly, idiom, vaxious, lescue. EzAiiri^ : ">~| ofnaU, ■"^" qfficiale, ^^^^jl^^ mimiae, /^ Arabil ^""^ Ontario, -^^ idiom 66 TBI ooitPLxrc raoHooaxpasR. § 241. la a limilar maimer, another seriM of donUa dgu mlglii Hiao be piorided for doable voweU having aa thdr baalo oompoiMnl the other 8h<»i doae Towel 98 ; bat it would be of little pnottoal valat In wdting Bnglidi, aa we have onlj one inatanoe of such a "^wHua- Uoa that doea not ftll witliin the scries given in the above taUt, oandy, the proper diphthong '"i i-H (ow). aaiPLB BKun nsnAD or nonnui auovabu. § 242. It la not impenUve Uiat the double ilgui should be nioU ; he doalde vowels may be oorracUy leprasented by the dmple signs ol their elementa, written to the oonaonants in aoootdaaoe with tfas prindples laid down at §§ 86 and 67 ; thus, we may writs -.:;^^ or .;™^. fyf toaing, ._ or «— for etqf^. TREBLE VOWEL^GNS. 4 243. WhMi the vowd-aoond < precedes the proper diphthongs i, 01. and ow, it may be represented by an initial tick ; thus, ExAiuus: "i^ffmU, '■^Omtoj/t. 4 244. When the vowd-aonnd t follows one of the Una proper diph> thongs, it may be represmted by a final tick; thus, ': 1^1, *i oi4, ^i ow-I, W mr-%. Kxtun t a : .^;w timig, i-^^_ onmyfry, '^^-^^ moubigt ../JnSs.?. nmmmg, ..|.^. dmtf. SAJB aUUBI IBBD lOR OHKK DOiniLI OB TaCBLI VOWIU. §245. No conftisian will result in reading if the above series of signs urealao aometimee used to represent such double ortnblavowelsss are oompoeed of an accented long-vowel or diphthong, and any diort- vowel, except Hi; thna, sign No. 14 may be employed tot t-l ia v^ Owen. In like maimer, sign No. 8 may be used for fit in crtalcr, Ma 22 for OF in Otalcgjf, etc. ucoBB AS lo mxBciioa or rm anoiip-vown auMa § 246. When mote convenient, Hie rigna opening to the rlgLt and Vift micf be indined a little bam the horiaontal ; thna, *j oi, *! 10, "j H<.«stathewardB t ix*^ t_ Omuing, J,tkowy, ^ch'fiii*,^. »cgbk. Osie most be taken, bowever, not to indine them so much that fh<7 win be llaUe to be mistaken for those opening npwwd and downward STENOTJPY. 67 ADDITIONAL CONSONANT-SIGNS. , DOT-SIGN BOK H. § 247. The consonant h is usually written with the stem hay ; but be- fore pee and hee, with simple beginning (that is, without initial hooks, circles, or loops) and in the middle of words, when the outline can be shortened or improved thereby, the h is either omitted or else written by a dot placed before the following vowel. ExAMrLEs: -\; heap, \ hub, ;'^;. habit, ^\^ perhaps, .(^^fS^..Al- hambra. TICK OR DOT SIGN WITH WH. ^ 248. In the compound wh generally the h need not be written. When, however, it is necessary to distinguish between words or names, such as White and Wight, the h may be indicated by prefixing an up- right tick to.the stem way, or by Writing a "dot between the stem and the following vowel ; thus, S, whey {way), "^ White {Wight). BEIBF SIGNS FOR Vr AND T. § 249. Owing to the difficulty of joining a nnmher of the stems to a preceding way or ^ay, in the case of a few words a small semicircle is employed as an additional sign for these letters^ For w it opens to the. right or left ( c i ), and for y either upward or downward ( " " ); thus, 5^ waived, J? wash. For the use of these brief-signs in phrases, see § 333, p. 105." THE NOMINAI. CONSONANT. § 250. When a word contains only vowel-sounds, it may be written by jjlacing the vowel-signs to a cancelled tee stem (] -f" J,) ! thus, .}, Eah, ''y lo. This sign is called the Nominal Consonant, and it is used by some in correspondence in writing initials of names. STENOTYPY. § 251. Phonographic outlines may be indicated by the letters of the ordinary printing alphabet in the following manner : Each consoiiant- Sij^ is represented by the letter or letters of the common alphabet by which it is most readily and naturally suggested. In the following list 68 THE OCniPLBTB FHOKOQKAPIIXB. tlie phowignpliie name of eadi consonant-dem to placed dinetlj mda (teno^iw. CONSONANTS. P peo B bee T D tee dee CH chay J j«y K kay G 8»y F ef V TH Tee ith dhee s ess Z toe sn SB diee ZH L sbee cl L loe B or R ree H em N en KG lug W Y H hay 'IMH,' 'BEB,' AXD 'BBS.* m M, d, and «' reqiecUvely, by being printed in Italics. Hie stenolype of mi, when struck upward, as In -i^-^ thcuthnitt, ^ X faelioiikl,a»0.,AoxMaim>h«viinteAlaltallot. or nms axo or emeus, books, bto., siiiuiautsaxii. § 2SS. The stenotfpea of the stem-signs are diatlnguldied from the sicnotypea of oonaonaota represented by the drcles, loops, and hook modlfloaUona, and the dot and tick signs fi»A m ; ^Kr, / CHr, ( THr, -^Wr; \ sPl, Q_ «n, ?_ aft, % aPr, <\asPr, S stPr; c_Kw, P Tir; c- Ky, '\ By; ,_ nsKr; _. Kf; ( DBtf; _, Kn, K^Vn; _=, Eshn, ^o Flahn; -aKtr; _«Kfii; \ Pns, \ Pnstr; Ntr, ^ Fltr, /^ Ztr, I Dtj ^PInt,,_BKt, ^sErt.o^ftnt, 'i.Drfts. § 254. When a stem modlficatian miqr be employed to write mora than one oonaonant, or group of oonsonants, its steoogiaph may Taiy Boooidingly ; thus, \, sPs or sPa, ,_, df a or sRi, _o En. Kas, or Ktt, yfBHorltti; ,^ Mf or Mr, ,^ Orf or Grr, ,^ sKf or sKt J Ttr, Mr, or-Whr.^-^ Mte, Mdr, or USbx ■,\ aPnt or d?nd. ■morma or sHAmn ctacum, mtc ft 865. The phonofype of a consonant written wiUi a diaded cinle, STENOTTPT. 69 loop; or hook, may be printed in full-faced type ; thus, ^_ Lz (laws) ^ RzA (raised), ^ Rzz (raises), --^i- Prv (prove), ^ RAv (rider), The stenotype of the wAan-hook is printed in italics when it ocoura after the css-drcle ; thus, g KssAn, {^ 'Fzshn. aTENOTTPES OF OUXUlfES CONTAININQ MOEE THAN OSTE STEM. § 256. A hyphen is printed between two stenographs (whether of single or group stems) to indicate that the signs they represent are joined ; an inverted aemcohn, to indicate that they are disjoined and written near each other ; a colon, to indicate that they are disjoined, and the second sign written close to, hut a little under the first ; an ' inverted period, to indicate that they are disjoined, and the second sign lapped over the first ; and a cross (-)-), to indicate that they are dis- joined, and the second sign written through the first. A simple space marks the ordinary separation between words. A numeral just after and generally near the upper part of a stenotype, whether of a simple or compound sign, indicates the position of its phonograph. When no numeral is'given, the second position is understood. A stenotype should be named according to the phonographic nomenclature already given. Examples : M^ N-V, V^^ B-K-M, G-G, ^^^ F-N, \ P-B, <_r-a, '~) H-Z, Q L-S3, „ Ks-K, ]_ D>K„ ^ Ps-V, J_ SH-K, _/— SS-K, t^ L-M, r^ Z-M, '--^ F-E. V P-iJ, — \ K-Pr, \x P-iBI, ^"A nsKr-B, /V nsi-V, =-V_ Gr-V, 1^ Trs-Ps, 3_p Trs-Gs, i_ Dns-NG, "^ PrssA«-Ii, 'p Kltr-L, /\ iJ-Pt-Bl, \) P-Zld, 1^ K-T-Gt, N^ P-Ld, V P-it; "LKiDBhn; I, D-Td; H±, Nn+D-Ktr ; :;;;^ M', ..|.. D', /I .B'-T, ""^" P»-T. § 257. When one of the signs mentioned in the last section is printed before a stenograph standing alone, it indicates how its out- line' is to. be written in relation to any outline that may precede it ; thus, !Pln' denotes the outline of cmtpMn, and also that it should be written near the next preceding word. See the prefix com, § 284. I^SS-CIBCLE BETWEEN STEMS. § 258. A circle between two stems may be considered as joined U either ; thus, ^-,5-^ Ms-M or M-sM, ,r-f Ms-i or M-si. Generally, however, the drole should be represented in connection with the stem that precedes it, except in cases where the phonographic outline would be best suggested by attaching it to the succeeding stem; thus; -/Ks-J,. ">■ Bs-J, f^ iJs-K; but JT T-sL, (^ F-si, ,_/" N-si* 70 THB OOUFLBTE rnOSOGBA.niSB. V0WKL8. § SS9. The Tovel-dgns, Imth dngle and doalile, tlioagli wldta meil in adTonoed rhonugreidiy, may, when nooesMuy, 1]0 IndkAtod m lulloira : «, », e. a, «; s. ». «• ^. ». &. 9. ( •] • : i -: ! 1 'j .< -i .1 lot I. Ol. ow, EW or Q, , «. at, 81, it, water. § 262. There are occasional exceptions to the rule given in the last section, as where uncommon, rarely used, or peculiarly formed words, for the sake of increased legibility, are written according to what may be called Analogy of Derivation or Composition, which requires that the derivative be written like its primitive, the signs for the _addi- tional sounds being simply joined on, or that a compound word should be written by merely joining together the ordinary outlines of its com- ponents, even in violation of the requirements of Form Analogy. But when both analogies agree in requiring a word to be written with a particular outline, but which carf not easily be made without taking oif the peri, it is better to disjoin than to change the outline ; thus, write F2-kshn:T, instead of F^-K-SH-Nt, for affectionate. SPECIAL DIRECTIONS AS TO CERTAIN OUTLINES. § 263. Speed in writing Phonography depends chiefly upon tho ability of the writer to make the various outlines of words without hesi- tation. This facility can be more readily attained by becoming thor- oughly familiar with the best modes of writing those syllables, oi small groups of consonants, that are common to classes of words, than by attempting to learn the outline of each word of the language sep- arately. The following tables and rules wiU be found useful in this connection. INITIAL LETTEKS. Examples: antagonist, antedate, antidote cajigraphy, calumny, calvinistio ' carbon, caricature, carpet catalogue, category, catenation centage, centennial, centiped, centage chirography, chironomy, chirurgeon Christmas, chromatic, chronic circuit, circus, Circassian •circle, circulate collateral, collect, colloquy cork, correct, coi'oner counterfeit, countersign cuticle, cutlet, cutting delicate, deliver Prefix. Sign. ant, by Nt i cal, Kl ' car, Kr ' cat, Kt ' cent, sNt ' chir. Kr ' cjir, a i cir, sR ' 11 sR ' col, Kl '■ cor, • Ki- ' counter, Kntr ' cut, Kt ' del. Dl ' 7S TBK OCOCPUnB PHONOOBAPHEB. Preex. fflgn. XnoBplM. enter. by Ntr in enteitain. ealaipriaa ftr. •« Fr t« ferment, fenrid, ferror far. «C i< famitare, flmiTe, farther bydi.. HDr" hydrant, hydranlic hydn^ Hdr t< hydrogen, hydrometer, hydropatUtt •"yPi P «« hypocrite, hypothMia tat. Kt t«mber, Septnogint taper, •I>r l« ■nperi), inperetirBO, tuperflne •opr. «i M ■nprunnndane, raprome •U,»yi,tu»," M «i aiaier, tyitem, auitain nnd«r. Ndr It nnderdone, iindetaign "1. VI tt Talae,TalTe wr, Vr tt verbal, verge, venion wl. VI t< Tolceno, Tolmne, voluptnoui ml. u tt vulgar, vnlnemble, voltiire WISAL 8TLLULES. ^ 2CI. The foUowing are lome of the principal finol fyUablM that «« UoUe to trouble the kamer : EximplM. in precjoe^ eritidie, ezerciio " mtndam, critiidHn, soleciim " diildhoad. aiateriiood, boyhood " relative^ native, active " radical, periodical, ethical " aolatitial, nnptial, martial " atoddudder, nphdder " themumeter, baianeter, hydrometer " regiater, cIoiMer, miniatw " basis, thena,'eritia, odaema " quiebide, ndieitade, latitude Safllz. fflgo. dae, ^ la cism. «< asH hood. It Hd ive, It V cal. tt Kl tial. U sm holder, tt HIdr 'ometor. cs Mtr star. <« str sis, SOS. <« ■a tode. (C Td GEiNEKAL EEMAEKS ON OUTLINES OF W0BD8. 73 § 2G5. When the final syllable -ly is preceded by a consonant written with a stem-sign, and there is no distinct yowel intervening, it is generally expressed by the e^hook on such preceding stem ; thus ^■/■fearly,-K:—^-- offiaMy, r-^-^ cabidy. In all other cases it should tie written, if possible, with the upstroke lee; thus, _jr' KeUy, Grs-£ groisly, Mt-l^ miMy, Pthr'-i fpiherly.. But when lee can not conveniently, be written, tl may be used instead, or else a disjoined lee ; thus, Jnt'-L, or '.L Jointly, J-sNt-L, or iZ adjarniUy. '-KT.'. § 266. The final syllable -ry is sometimes expressed by the cr-hook and sometimes by the stems ree and er, being governed by the same rule as -h/; thus, \:^'- fishery, A drudgery; but \/- berry, ^' story, M.S-S.' misery, Et»-iB artery. «-TT.' § 267. The final syllable ty may sometimes be expressed by halving the preceding consonant-stem ; thus, Ir' utility, ^- activity. This ex- ception is only allowed for the purpose of improving or shortening cer- tain outlines. 'in' akd 'on.' ^ 268. /n.and on are never written with the n-hook except in the words —C-- therein, (, thereon. *-inEE.' ^ 269. The final syllable -ture (as well as -ter and -tor) may some- times be indicated by the mma, V>-N8t ««Nc«i. 4. When the present tenae ends with the tf-loop,— hy changing the 'oop to the Mt^irde, and adding tti; thus Kst* oeoMt, Ka-Td' aoDO*d ABBREVIATION. $271. Although Phonognpl^ proTldes on ozoeodingljr perfect mcMia of npreaenting all the sounds used in the English language, so that it meets (he roquircmenls ot a very exact phonetic analTils, yet it ii by no means esMmUal to l^IblUty that la actual praotlM the signa hy. Tliis, howerer, is so &r from being the case that all ezperioieod writers praCnr unTOcalised to vocalised out- Unea, and consider Uiat on eztensire insertion of the Towels is an actual detriment in readfaig. The prindpal causes of tliia legibility an tiiese : (1.) As the Towd-signs form no port of the ouif the first, second, or third plaoe, even if two or more words bould happen to be written with tlw some outline, they may gMK eiaDy be distinguished by this diffiomoe of podtitm. (4.) In the bw cases of words that contain the same oonsimaat-sonnds, «id that be long to tlie same podtion, tdien neoeassiy, distinctions «e ditsined by some aiUtiaiy diffiEienoe cf pcdtion or oufline, or else by voflsHdiifc partially or in fnll, one, and generally tlie more mwommon, of Om SDoAIcUng words ABBKEVIATION. 75 VOWELS TO BE OUinED. § 273 When the learner has mastered the principles of Phonogra- phy thus far explained, and has become somewhat familiar with the outlines of words, he should begin to leave out the . signs of the vowels, or, in other words, to write what is called "Unvocalized Pho- nography. ' ' But' in order that his ^vritidg may not become illegible to him by a too. sudden transition, it will be found the safer plan to com nence by omitting the vowel-signs only m the following casts : I. When the existence of the vowel is indicated by some peculiia method of Writing the consonant outlines, as is the case with the ital- icized vowels in the words ask [§ 113] ; racy [§ 115] ; bushy [§ 130] ; Alike [§ 132] ; felly [§ 133] ; ark [§ 135] ; berry [§136] ; coffee, gravy, many [§ 179] ; into, induce [§228] ; poet [§ 233] ; solid [§ 234] ; appel late [§235]. n. From short words of frequent occurrence, as in by, be, at, it, up, say, th^, on, in, etc. in. Unaccented vowels, as in votary, capital, possible, enemy, prom in«nce, etc. IV. In long words, medial vowels, whether accented or not, as in imostentatious, incidental, statesmanship, etc. VOWEIS TO BE IKSEBTED. § 274. The vowel-signs most essential to legibility, and which the learner should still continue for a while to insert, are the following : • I. An accented in preference to an unaccented vowel ; thus, _j3 oc- msion. II. A diphthong, whether accented or not, in preference to a simple vowel. III. An initial or final vowel, unless it is indicated by some pecu- liarity of the consonant outline ; thus, I aUic, ~^ — ergo. i IV. The sigibof the diphthong r generally at the end of a word, and usually at the commencement when it can be joined to the first consonant-stem ; thus, L defy, -^ • idea. Initial i, when joined, may generally be abbreviated, its last stroke only being written, which may be struck either upward or downward, as is most convenient; tlias, '^ island. The stenotype of this sign is 1 — the direction of the accent mark showing the inclination of the sign. V. In words having a vowel before and after a single consonant- stem, both should be written, if possible ; but if only one can bo inserted, the accented one will generally afford the best clue to tho word ; tlins, X or \ oJ^. 4 76 TBK OOXFLETR FnOMOGRAJ>USB. WORDS dishnqdisiied bt difference cr ovrusn, FosrrioN, Eto. § 276. Tha goDeiml omiaioii of the Towd-dgu, m we ha.rt tn, rmden it nooemiy to make distinctiona b«t«Mn oertiUn vordt hy u Ulnry differences of outline, position, or TooallnUon. woBoa oonascwa wrni 'n,' 'm,' 'n,' 'n,' 'm,' 'n.* $ 279. Wboi negktiToa sre fonned by prefixing the partiole in to icelUTe wonb tliat begin with i, «i, or r, for the tSke of euphony, the particle ii dianged rapcctively to 8, nn, or v-, ao that the flnt conio- uaat of the ncgaUro beoomce donlded, ai in the words iHval, Annals rial, irrtfidar, etc This doubling of Uie first consonant also ooouis, of conne, in negatives made by prafizlng ui or un to posltiro words bo- glnning with n, as in iimcBiotn, wuktm, eto. Now, in ordinary qieech, we frequently beer but one of these conaonants spoken, the negaUre hdng dbtinguUhod from lis ootreqxmdlng porilive word only by the sound of its initial towoI. In unvooallaed Fhonography, however, this dirtinction would not appear, and therefore both oonsononts slumld be written, even in those cases where only one is heard ; thus, write .-"-T- kfd, -(pr^ mtgiO, "^ modtnlt, C^.. emmantle. 4 277. LIST OF woana dibtikocished bt diwbbkiick or ooruiia, rOSITIOM, OK TOCALUATIOS. Kst>, cost— Ks-D', caused K-Jl'. cudgel— K.J*-t, cajole KuAm', causation — KsiAa*, aeeeasion — KuAn*, accusation K»-T*-N-SBn, extenuation- Ks-T*-Nshn, extenrion Klzhn'', colUsioa — ^K-£cha*, coalition — K-£iizhn*, colludon K-s Ass, exerrisB — ^K-sB-Sa, exorcise Kr-Pr'-i:., corporal— Kr-P'-ifl, corporesl Gd>, God— G>D', guide Grd*-N, gardoi — Gr-Dn*. gaarilian T*- Ar, tartar— Trtr», trailor-Tr»-Dr, trader ABBKEVIAITON. 77 Trn", train— T'-^Jn, turn IV, truth— Tr% true ^ Tn»-B(-L), attainable— T'-N-Bl, tenable Dtr', daughter, doubtSPr^Dt'-K, auditor— Dt'-iJ, auditory Dtr% debtor— Dt'^-K, editor D^-Lt-R, adultery— I-D'-i-Tr, idolatry- i-D'-itr, idolater Dss', decease— D'-sZ, disease Dss=-T, deceased, desist— D'-sZd, diseased i-D'-L-Ns, idleness — D'^-L-Ns, dullness D'-M-Ns-Tshn, administration — D'-Mns-Tshn, demonstration P'-M-Nshn, damnation— D'-M-Nshn, dimension- iD'-M-Nshn, con- demnation — D5'-M-Nshn, domination D'-iJshn, adoration^Drshn'', duration Jnt', gentleman^J'-Nt, giant Jnt", gentlemen — 3'-Nt, agent Jnt' '-L, gentlemanly — Jnt'-L, gentle — Jnt'-L, genteel P=-R, poor— P'-iJ, pure Pt'-/2n, pattern — P'-Trn, patron Pshnt", patient — ^Pshn'-T, passionate p=.jR-Ps, purpose — Pr'-Pa, propose , Pr'-P-iJ-T, property— Pr'-Pr-T, propriety Pr°-Prshn, appropriation — Pr'-Pshn, proportion — Pr'-P-iJshn, prepa- ration . Pr^-Pshn-D, proportioned — Pr'-Pshn-aT, proportionate Pr'-Bshn, approbation — Pr'-Bshn, probation — Pr'-Bshn, prohibition Prt'-Kshn, protection — Pr'-D-Kshn, production, predication Pr'-Tn, pertain— P'-iJ-Tn, appei'tain I'r^-sKshn, prosecution — P'-iJs»Kshn, persecution Pr'-sK-B, proscribe — Pr'-sK-B, prescribe I'r'-sE, oppi-essor — P'-iB-S-E, pursuer — P'-iJ-Zr, peruser Vr^-SH, Prussia— P=-U-SH, Persia Prshn", Prussian — P^'-Rshn, Persian — P'-iJshn, Parisian P'-jRshn, apportion — P^-ifehn, portion Pr'-Fr, proffer— Prf=-E, prefer Pr'-Ms, promise — Pr'-Mis, premise Pr'-Mn-Nt, permanent — I'r'-Mn-Nt, preeminent Prt'-Nr, partner — P'-Nr, part-owner B'-s£et, obsoltete^B'-stt, absolute -B--E-TH, birth— Br'-TH, breath Brt', bright— Br'-D, broad Bf =,-before— B'-V,. above Bn'-Dnd, abandoned — Bnd^^Nt, abundant siD', steady— sTd", staid ' 78 TIIE COUPLETS FUONOQIUf U£B. ■U*. ■!>£»— A*-J, stowaga •P*-iIt, Bopport— «Fn*, Mpanta— ■Pt*-D, iprwd cCRshn', ntnation— •Xaho*. sUlioil iTHil*. atliebt— Tllat', ibeist •TIIn'-T-K, atheUUc— TIIs*-T-K, theiatio ftTIl*-Z-M, •Uuoim— TIl'-tM, tlieism K*.Vrd, (iiTowd— F*-Vr.T, favorite F'-Ml, fomul-ly— P-Mi^r^ fonneri/ F'-Nr-L, riutenl— F*-X-/d, funereal F'-Ba, fierce— F'-/li, furioua K'-Wnl, furwanl— Fr*.Wrd, frowanl F*-B-M, af-Bm— FS fiirm Vt'-BI, raloable— V*-L-BI, available— V'-L-BI, voluble VUiD*, raloatiaa— V*-£ahD, Thdaiion Vi'-£ai, vktlent— V'-Xnl, valiant V'-K4din, arocatJon— V*-Kihn, rocaiion Ki-Bd, nobod;— K'-Bd, anybody KM'-K*hn, indicaiimi- N-O'-Kdin, indiiciion V-V*-SUa, innovation— N-Vibn*, invaiion N-Vi*.Bl, inevitable— M-V'-n-BI, nnavoldnblo N-DH-Nt, indefinite— N-Df'-iXd, nndefinod Nd'-La, endle**— Kd'-£a, ncedlca N'J^-Ma, inimiaaa— K-J'-K-S, ingenuont Nns-Td*, iniereced- Kdn-D*, underatood U-Pihn'-D, Impaidoned — M-I'>bn'-&T, impnnionato — M-Fihnt*, Inpatient M-Bi*, amiable— n-M-BI', or M-BI*, homblo Mn*-Nt, eminent— Mn'-Nt, inimineiA Ms-S*. Mn.— Mm*. Mine* M-N-TH*, month— Mn-T*, minnto M'-Grt, migrate— M*-€rt, emigrate— M'-Grt, immigrate M'-Grdin, migration— M'-Gnbn, emigratioa— H'-Grtlio, immigra- tion BIshn', miaaion — ^H-SHn', machine Kdta-S?, missionary— M-SII'-Kr, macbineiy /P-Kd, mined— iP-Kd [tide for eu joined], renewed /2*-Pnhn, rqiresnon — ^iiP-P-iZsbn, reparation /{■-Fr-Kdra, refraction— £r*-Z^Kshn, reflection Kx'-M, resnme — ^IP-S-M, reassume iW.lesB— «i:s%dse /A'-Td, latitude— t'-T-Td, altitude i-lMi\ island— £nd', bind W'-Mn, woman — ^W'-Mn, women ABBEEVIATIOM. 79 OMISSION OF CONSONANTS. . § 278. The omission of consonamt^signs'from the outline of words will he treated of under the general heads of " Word-Signs" and "Con- tractions." WOED-SIGNS. § 279. If has been ascertained hy calculation that ahout a hundroa. lifferent words constitute more than one half of all the English that is poken or written ; that is, in a sermon, nevitspaper, speech, or debate, in which say ten thousand words occur, full five thousand Will be made, up by the repetition of c^ain common words, not exceeding a hundred in number. Kow one of the prime necessities of a practica- ble system of shorthand, is a simple and brief means of writing these frequent words. Many of them are short words of but one consonant,- which, being written by a single stroke of the pen, do not, of course, require abbreviation. But a considerable number contain several consonants, which, if written in full, would make outlines of incon- venient length ; therefore, as far as possible, they are contracted, and one, two, or three consonants, as the case may be, used to represent the entire word. Strictly speaking, all such abbreviations would come under the general designation of "Contractions;" but, for the sake of convenience, such of them as are written with only one stem-sign, "feither simple or compound, are called," Word-Signs,'' and the use of the word "Contractions" reirtricted to'those that contain two or more stems. The term Word-S:gn is also applied to uncontracted outlines containing single stems, simple or compound, that are written out of the position to which their accented vowels would entitle them, as well as to the signs of a few words that are written with vowel or diph- thong signs not in connection with any consonant-stem. A word that is represented by a word-sign is called a " Sign-Word." § 280. The following is a list of the word-signs arranged in the order of the tables of consonants and vowels. Each consonant word- sign is represented by its phonotype, and opposite it are its sign- words, printed in three lines and united by a brace The words in the upper line are written with the word-sign placed in the first position ; those in the second line with it in the second position ; and those in the third line with it in the third position. When several words of the same position are represented by the same sign, they are such words as from practical experience are found not to conflict when so written, the context always showing which is intended : and the word for which the sign is most frequently employed is given first. When s word^sign outline is used ^^ign-words of only one or two positions, 80 not ooHTXBim FBOirooitiLraiCE. the TMaut poaitiona ars fiUed If words that an taOf and propanf ftipieaMd by the ontlina and podtiisl. . (distinct deliver-y / /" / / / (deliverance ("Dr. (Doctor) ■< dray (during -^ dwell f (differ-ence-ent CH (^charge < whic' [each -< which, change (e, (childre (large -< advantage (largely -| angel (larger (jr. (Junior) (join meB. P ■jreeaaeedaa — (wiodMr, endra • NO nnig ■ amonK (tUng "-^ BC <-> {a?Si2 ^-^ (singular <-\ (dmihriiy Si^ 'jamongat *-* (almsat \>mmd «— ' (longer W r> {tmUu jMOMrhat ■^ why ' Vmmi (.mofenwnt ■^ (water •{ leather T (mjr r (beyond - (.msanuice ( H (ihwof (Horn v^ -^ -he, Urn «bo-m ABBEJSVIATION. CIBCLE AND VOWEL SIGNS. ° as, has -_.. the [emphatic] - is, his o ' ."iJ an^ and ' awe . a , 0, oh, owd ... the / owing .'.. ah ,5 owes • aye [meaning ' ever'] ^ aye [meaning 'yes'] 85 'now' and 'new.' § 282. Bn is the only consosout-somid of so large a number of words that it becomes necessary to increase their legibiKty by mating a some- what arbitrary distinction in the case of the two words now and neu>; the first being written with the first stroke of the sign ow joined finally to the stem, and the other with the last stroke of ew joined also at the end ; thus, ^^ now, new. CONTRACTIONS. PBEnXES AND SUFFIXES. § 283. One of the most convenient modes of abbreviation is the use of contractions for certain initial or terminal syllables that are of fre- quent occurrence, called fkefizes and suffixes. By this means a largo number of words may sometimes be abbreviated without burdening the memory with more than a single sign. PBEFIXES. % 284. The prefixes are written as follows : 1. Com, con, cum, cog. — The syllables com, con, cum, whether at the commencement or in the middle of words, and cog in the middle of words, are generally not written, bat indicated by proximity, that is, by writing the part of the outline that comes after the omitted syllable near the part that precedes it ; thus, (<^ they complained, '^^^ in complete, /^ rec- ommend, W decompose, [N^ discompose, '^--^\ unreeomgensed, "^' in- constant, /C^ irreconciliation, ^- [see prefix for mt/y. Initial eef- is alwajrs written K-G. Sometimes it b aliowalde to j<4n the liuter part of the word to tlie Km, without ttUng off the pen; thus, h imteadof ~[; foroocaiRiHodii- (MS, -s^" imeommtteat, ■■^" imaniHdtnihh, ,/\>^ eirawni/iBrsiie*, ^ arcmmJUx. But this should bo done only in the case of a few words of frequent occurrence, and when the outline so formed is unlike that of any other word with which it misht conflict. 1. Fon— aomatiiiies by F joined to the romoindor of the word ; that, .V«^^_ fmward, V. fanetr. S. Mao**, Ukom, maoki — by the siem M written partlaHy over the remafaider of the word ; thna, "^^-^r* majHmimoui, '|_^ magiuUe, yi magwify. 4. Ssur— by the cst ewr. 4. FoBM— by F joined ; thna, 4^ wu/mrm, y\. r^am. ABEEEVIATION. 87 5. Ing — by a light dot at the end of the preceding part of the word, when 1 it can not conveniently he expressed by the stem NG ; thus, s; petting, ._.. meeting. * The plural ings, in such words, may be expressed by a circle in place of the dot; thus, -^" meetings. The suffix-signs for ing and ings are used generally after contractions, after stems with final loops, and always after half-length P, B, M, and Hj thus, F{-y parting, Bl(')' belonging, JRsti'Y resting, Mstr(-)" tnasler- ing, Bt{-y betting, _^°_ mattings, Hd(-)' hiding. 6. Menial or mentality — by Mnt written near the eni of the pre- ceding part of the word; thus, f^ instrumental-ily, xp^fundamental-ity. 7. Ology — by J joined to, or disjoined and written partially under, the preceding part of the word, when it can not as conveniently be writ- ten in full; thus, };^ physiologt/, J. astrology. 8. Self — ^by the ess-circle joined to the preceding part of the word ; thus, "^^ myself. 9. Selves — by the large circle joined to the preceding part of the word ; thus, (^ themselves. 10. Ship — by the stem SH written near, or joined to, the preceding part of the word ; thus, CJ lordship, ^}~^__^ partnership. 11. SoEVEE — by sV joined to the preceding part of the word; thus, b lohatsoever. 12. WOETHY — by DH, usually joined, but detached when it does not make a good junction vyith the preceding stem ; thus, "^ praiseworthy, S':DII seaworthy. OMISSION OP CERTAIN CONSONANTS. § 286. Consonants may be omitted from the outlines of words, with- out impaii-ing their legibility, in the following cases : 1. K or G — generally after ing, unless the K or G is final; thus, 0> sanction, ""^ sanctify, ~^. anxiety, '^—^ angle, \_^ banker. 2. A T sound — at the end of a syllable immediately after the ess-circle, when the next syllable begins with a stem-sign ; thus, ^KM nrDO» n * -iinAi<-LT.' 4 287. Most word* taSag in •nlta/ or -mH^g muf In aUiraTiatad bif iMTing off the final i^nables -(Mi/ or Aiaffjr; thna,'^ prmb»HtU-lf, l^^ tabdmliallf. OMtBuoN or nOOKB. ^ 388. When in tlie mtddle ofa word we would netonlly be diqioied to write a coDMoant with a final lioolc, but find it impraetlaable, raoh consonant tbooU be written with iia atem-aign. But if the atetn-aign alio malcei « bad or awiiwaTd joining, the consonant may be omitted. And if die omline is not then snflleietttljr legible, the sign of die Towd wbidi oecnrs Immediateljr befbre the omitted consonant may be inserted. ExAMn.n: J- alloui, [^ olteiaaMai, ')" oss^ %, airigimtnl, ]' tnau, X^ Iraa^poss, -T lard, tf^ bmiibrd. LIST or woniHuun amd oosTRAoriom. ^ 289. The following ai« eomplete lists of the word-stgns and contrac- tions. Intheflntiheyai«arnuigedintheori)erofthea,6, ealphi^t, and in tlie second, in the order of the lAonographie dphabet Ijeamers shooU eoosuit the first while writiig and die second while na^ng pho- nography. woRO-aion Airo ooanACnoxs — a, d, o obobo. A B aoooiding, IM' advantage, J* •dvwtiaa, Db* elmaat. Mat' already, £r* altogeHMr. Gthr* among, MO* an.d, J _ angel,'K* another. Kite* any,H» archai^d, R*-A aichfaidi^, iP-CR-B architeetHne^l, B'-K-T are,JZ* ariatocHMT^ide, Bs'-T-K astoniBh-ed, St* bankmpter, B'-lfOr-S baptism, Bt*-«U beeanse, Kc' become, B*-K before, Bf* began, Gn' b^n,Gn' b^nn,Gn* bdieCve, BP belong, BI> between, lb* beyond, T* bishopric, B*-SQ-K bretinvn^m* brother, Bi* bnt,B* caUneLK-B' ABBEEVIATION. 89 capable, K-B1= captain, K-Pn' catholic, K-TH' certificate, sJSt^-F change, CH^ characteristic, Kr'-Ks-K charge, CH' children, CHI' Christian, Kr' circumstance, sTns' citizen, sTn' collect, KP-K come, K' correct, KrVK could, K' county, Knt' cross-examine, Kr'-sMn D December, D'^-sM defendant, D" degree, Gr' deUver-y, Dl' democracy-tic, D'-M democrat, D'^-M describe, sKr' description, sKrshn' develop, Dv°-P did, D» . differ-ence-ent, Df ' difficult-y, Klt= discriminate, Ds'-Kr-M distinct, Dst' do, D= Dr. (Doctor), Dr» doctrine, D'-Trn dollar, D' domestic, D=-Ms-K during, Dr? dwell, Dw= E effect, F'-K endeavor, N-Dv' especial-ly, S°-P establish, St'-B ever, Y' experience, sPrns' extraordinary, sTr'-7J F fact. Ft' familiar, F'-M familiarity, F'-M February, F"-B first, Fst' for, F» form, F' frequent, Frnt' from, M' G gave, G" general-ly, Jn° gentleman, Jnt' ■ gentlemen, Jnt" give-n, G' go,G' govern, Gv" ' governor, G-V" Great Britain, Grt»-Brt H TH had, D' half, F' halve, V has, ° hath^H' have, V he,H" health-y, TJ hear-re, R' heaven, Vn" help, L'-F her, E= him,H= his, — home, M' immediate, M^-Md importance-t, M-Prt' indispensable-y, Nds-Pns' influence, N-Fs' insurance, Ns^ intelligence, Nt-Jns° 90 TUB OOUPUETB FHOMOQIUrnRB. Janoaiy, V-V Jr. (JnniorX Jc* kingdom, K* knew (ame aa aev) koowledce. N-J> lanenatie, Gw' l«R^J' legntamra, L*-J Impb-T, NO-TH* lone NO' mannfiictiire, M-N-P* MMtnduuMtt, M«-CH* nMmaar, n ■nMnonnda, M-M-D' mamoismlnm, M'-M mtenka, M**-K Mr.(Miitar^Mr* mommant, Mnt* N ,K-V» New York, N-r nest, Hit* no, air, Ns* November, N-T* now, "^ number, Br* O O, tA, owe, , object, B* riijeet', B* obterratiaii, B'-siUm opiBion,Fn* oppommi^, F* other, DBr* oor,i2' r,Vr' own, N' l«rt,P« janicobir, Pn* iweidiw, P*.K pecnlieritT, P'-K |>eopl^ Pf> perfomance, Pr'-Fli perpendieular-ity. Pr'"'-Pn-D phonography, Fa' plaintiCr, K plenipotmtiMT, Pin*-!* popniar4t7, ** -1' powUe-y, Pa* pnustieo, Pr' preliminary, Pr'-ii-M prindpal-le, Pr' prirUen, Prv'-J probable'y, Pr'.B prababitiQ', Pri-B proportion, Pr'-Pahn pnblie^biP'-B Q qiioUfy, Kw-F" qnartar, Kwtr' qacition, Kw* TecoUect, 72* rerer^Dce, Af * regular, JR^-Q rwnloriijr, R'-Q region, Sl'-J remark, R'-M remember, B*-U rqneaent-stiTg IP-P rqmblic^h, it*-P-B respoDtible-y, Si^-Pm reaponsibility, iV-Pna Ber. (Beverend), B*-V Bomaa Catholic, fi'-K-TH 8 Son Frandfoo, aNia*>K oatioEurtory, ifP-tR Sqiierober, sFt'-M ABEEEVIATION. 91 several, sV' shall, SH' should, SH' signify, sG^ similiir, sM^ similarity, sM' singular, sNG' somewhat, sMt" southern, sDHn" speak, sP° special-ly, sP* subject, sB^ suggestion, sJn' surprise, sPrz' swear, sR' swift, sFt' system, ssT^ T thank, Til' ' that, DH' the, .-.. . them, DH» their, there, DHr" these, Z' thing, NG' think, Tll=' time, M' together, G' transubstantiation, Tr"-sB truth, Tr» U understo'bd, Kdrs-D' United States, Ys' usual-ly, ZH' W was, Z' wealth-y, WP well, L' were, R' what, T» when, W' where; R' which, OH' whom, H' will, Z" with, DH^ without, wDIi' world, iJld'' worth, TH» would, W^ year, Y= yes, sir, Yss° yet,Y" young, Y" your, Y^ youth, TH= § 290. WOKD-SiaNS AKD contractions — PHONOSKAPHIC ORDER. Pr'-i-M, preliminary Pr'^'-Pn-D, pei-pendicular-ity Pr^-Pslm, proportion Prt^, particular Prv'- J, privilege Pn', opinion . sP^, special ly, spoke sP', speak sPrz', sui-prise sPrns^. experience sPt^-M, September P',part P^ plaintiff P', opportunity P'-P, popmlar-ity P=-B, public-sh P'-K, peculiarity P°-K, peculiivr Ps', possible-y PP, people. Pln'-P, plenipotentiary Pr',' practice , Pr', principal-Ie Pr'-B, probable Pr'-B, probability Pr'-Ps, performance B B', ob'ject B", but, object' B°-K, become 93 TnK OOUrUTTB rHOHOOBATHEB. B'-SH-BLluhoiirie B'-NGivS, buikni|>l(7 B'-ilbbn, ofacemuiou 1U<, lieionK lii* belier-Te Br*, nnmber, broUier Brn*. brethren Bi*-Kl, brodMr-ia-Uw B(*, befora Bt*-iM, bapium ■B , rabject T*. wluU Tr*, truth ly-tB, tninobiianiiaiion Tn*. between af-tS, ntiffiwiorjr ' ifTi'-R, extraordiiuu7 •Tn*. eitiien ilTnt*, cimtniManre Ml?, qrileni D 7>\ hwl. dollar I)*, do, defendant n'.dfcl V-H, danocnKj-tie l>*-lt, damocnu Iht'i advertiM li*-*U, December D*-Ma-K, dameaiSe Dal*, diiOnet D'-Tm, doctrine DP, deliTer-7 Dr',Dr.(Doet(ir) Dr*, dnrlag Dw*,diRll D'-«Rr-M, dtacrimtiiate Df , difliei^«nefr«nt Dv>-P, derekp cn CH', charge CH*. irhich, change cm*, children J*, large J*, adrantage J'-N, Januarr Jl*. angel Jr*, junior Jn\ ("eneiel-lj Jnt', gentleman Jnt*, gentlemen ■Jn*, soggeation K K', can K*, come K'jooold, kingdom K>BS cabinet K-TH>,catlioUe Ki', because K-Bt*. eipablo K-Pn', captain K1*.K, collect Kit', difficult-y Kr*,Chrittlan Kr*-K, correct Kr*-K*-K, characteriilio Kr'-iMn, croH-examlne Krd', accoixllng Kw*, qneatlon Kw-FS qualify Kwtr', quarter Xnt', county bKH, deaeribe •Knnn*, deiciiplion O'.go G*, gnre, together G , gif e-n G-V, governor Gr*. degree Grt*-Brt, Great Britain Gw', langnage Gv', gorem Gn', began Gn , begun 6n*, begin Gthr', altogether (G*, rigoify V F', form, half F*. for F'-B, Febmaiy ABBEEVIATION, 93 F»-K, effect, T'-M, familiarity r'-M, familiar Pst", first Fint^, frequent Fn', phonography Ft', fact sj"t', swift V V', have, halve V, ever Vr', over Vn', heaven sV", several TH TH', thank, hath TtP, worth TH', think, youth DH DH», that BH", them DH=, with DHr', other DHr°, their, there sDHn', southei-n wDH', without S S'-P, especial-ly St', astonish-ed- St'-B, establish Z', was V, tliese SH', shall SH', should SH Zll ZH', usual-ly Z», well V, will i=-P, help i'-J, legislature i"-TH, health-y ir°, already E=,her R', hear-re K'-K-T, arcliitect-ure-al K"-M, remark R^'-M, remember Rs'-T-K; aristocracj--atic R"-J1, archangel sR', swear R iJ', are, our IP, were, where, recollect 7i"-P, i^preseht-ative 2J^-P-B, republlc-sb JJ'-CH-B,.archbishop iJ'-K-TH, Roman Catholic iJ'-G, regularity -R'-G, regular m-N, Rev. (Keveiend) 7i's'-Pns, responsible-y jRs'-Pns, responsibility iJl'-.T, religion RW, world Bi"^, refer-ence TJshn^, recollection siJt'-F, certificate M M', from, time M', home, member M'-M, memorandum M-M-D' , memoranda M-N-E', manufacture Ms-CH', Massachusetts Ms=-K, mistake Mst', almost M-Prt', importance-t M'-Md, immediate Mr=, Mr. (Mister) Mnt°, movement sM', similarity sM', similar sM°-NG, something sMt', somewhat u TBB ooaiFisn FHOHOaBArnSB. N', own 'W*,wlwn If, may W*.woald K' (Willi final iMpoidieiikr tidk). \VI<, wMdth-7 K' (wiUi tick indioed lik« CBX T new, knew T', beyond N-J*. knoirlodge Y» yet, yonng K*-G,MKlect y, yonr, year M-V», ntva, KoTcmber Yf', United Suiet Ym*. yet, sir H-Y», N«w lotk N-I>**,eiidMTor N«*, no, ur 11 K«*.iiwiniiM n*. be, bim U', whom Km*, neu Kdhr', aaoiliw CntCLB AKD VOWBL NJn-D*, nadentood O .. 1 Ni-Jn**, inionigMce , M, luif ■NmA-K, San FfmndiGO ...l.,bi. an, and NO ., (lie NG<, long y m NO', mnong 'I NO*, thins KO.TB*,lMigt)>^ ' awo ■NO*, dngnlar , 0, oh, owe w ^ !9I. In the foregoing litta of conlraetloni only the form* of primi- tive word* are given ; In the (bUowing lift the forms of the deriratiree will be found. Someiime* a word that in one of iu parts U contracted, in oib«m if best written In foIL according— accordingly, Krd' iL •dnuitag" — adnmtageiMU, J*-8 advextise — adteitned, Sid* ; adrertiting, IH(')' ; adrertlsement, D'-iMnt ■moDB— amongst, NOat* angel— angdic, Jl*-K aatonUh — astonidiing^ 8l(')'f aatonisbingily, St'!£; astonltluaent, St'-Mot B'we — awed. &D'; awing, same as owe widi li^r-dot; awe-ftmdk, •awe':«tr»-K ; awfoMy.n* ban k! m»t c y — hanknipt, B'-KGr-Ft, etc. become — beooming, B*-K('); became, B*-K-M ABBEEVIATION. 95 begin — beginning, Gn(-y.; beginner, B'-G-Nr believe — believed, Bld^ ; believing, Bl(-)' ; believable, Bl'-Bl; be- liever, B13-Vr ; unbelief, N-Blf ;. unbeliever, N-BP-Vr belong— belonged. Bid' ; belonging, Bl(')' capable — capability, K-Bl'-T; capableness, K-Bl'-Ns: incapable, N-K-Bl' change — changed, CHd=; changing, CH(-)°; iehangeable, CH^-Bl; changer, CH^-Jr ; interchange, Ntr-CH° ; unchanged, N-CHd" charge— charged, CHd' ; charging, CH(-)' ; chargeable-y, CH'-Bl Christian— Christianity, Krs-CHnt' ; Christianize', KrB-CH'-Nz ; anti- Christian, Nt'-Krn circumstance- circnrastanced, sTnst''; circumstantial-ly, sTn' ; cir- cumstantiate, sTn'-SHt Golleot— collected, Kl-K-Td" ; collecting, KP-K(-) corrfect — corrected, Kr-K-Td"; correcting, Kr=-K(-); correctly, Kr-K-Z"; correctness, Kr'-K-Ns deliver— delivered, Did' ; delivering, Dl(")= ; deliverance. Dins' ; de- liverer, DP-R describe — described, sKrd" ; describing, sKr(')' develop — developed, Dv"-Pt: developing, Dv°-P("); development, Dv=-P-Mnt differ — differed, Dfd=; differing, Df(0'; differs, Dfz= ; indifferent', N-Df= discriminate — indiscriminate, N-D'-sKr-M distinct — distinction, Dst'-NGshn ; distinctive, Dst'-NGt-V; distinct- ness, Dst'-Hs domestic^— domesticate, D'^-Ms-Kt ; domestication, D^-Ms-Kshn dwell— dwelt, Dw'^-Lt ; dwelling, Dw(-)" S effect— effected, IT'-K-Td ; effecting, F=-K(-) ; effective, F'-K-Tv esperieQce — experienced, sPrnst' ; experiencing, sPrns'-NG extraordinary^ex.traordinarily, sTr'-iJ-i ' r familiar — familiarize, U'-Mz ; unfamiliar, N-F°-M form — formed, Fd'; forming, P(-)' ; formal, F'-Ml ; formation, Fshn' ; perform, Pr'-F; performer, Pr'-F-Mr; inform, N-F' ; information, N-Fshn" ; reform, i2'-F ; reformation, iJ'-Fshn frequent— frequence, Fr'-Kwns G general — generality, J'-N-iJlt ; generalize, J.'-N--Rlz ; outgeneral, T>-Ja gentleman — gentlemanly, Jnt'ii; ungentlemanly, N-Jnt' iZ-^ gOvetn^-governed, Gvd"; governing, Gv(-)°; government, Gv'-Mnt 96 TDK OOUPLBTB PUOMOOBAniER. z Important— milmpotlMit. N-M>Prt* tnflwwn e e — inBuw iced, K-Ftt*; iaflaaneing. N-Fi*-MO ; inSamtial, N-FJ»« Intwlll ga nc e— imriUgwit, KUnt»; intdlieiUe-r, Kt-J*-BI i noimellK gaile-y,N-NuJ«.Bl * K. knowladg*— Mknovledge, K-N-J' (or K-J') l» laics— iartar, Jr> ; largest, Jm* ; lartely, JI' long— looter, MGr* ; longett, KGtt' ; lonK-hand, £*-KG-lInd n*annCutnre — manafiiciiired. M-N-F'-K-CUnl; mannractaring, M-N-F(-)<; iiianu6tctonr,M-N-F'-i{; maiinfactiiror, M-N-F'-U mlatakn— miflakan, Ifa'-Kn; mistook, Mt'-K: uniobtakable-v, NM«-K-BI* ,M-V» nay r — nowrthelaas N-Vt*-/j Raw Tork-Now-Ywiier, N-Y<-Kr noi^bar— nnmborad, Brd*; niunbaring, Br(-)*; outnumber, T'-Brj nimwBlMrail, II>Brd* O oUMt— aid«!twl,B*!D: obl«»ing, &(•)• ; objoetion, Bilm' opinion— ^nioiMted, l>n*-K-Td ; opiniomd, Pn*-NIIEn. liEMABKS OX TIIE WOOD-SIGNS AND CONTRACTIONS. ^ 393. The (bregoing list of contrnciioM ia deiigned mainly for the OM of Um reporter ; therefore (be lum-pTofeMlaial writer may adopt only ao many end sodt of tlieae dga* «s suit hia toato or oonTenlotce, It la reoommended, howerer, that all who can apare the time ahonld faiiiiUaiiae themaclree with the entire liat, becauie it i« alwaj-a eaaler to write loag forma after oommtttmg to memory aliortor onca, than li adopt abbreriated iinma, haring flrat formed the habit of n»lni[ fnl OQlllDfla. aAXB aiOM roB raasiiT axd vait TKxaca. § 29S. When a word-aign or oontmotlon repreaenta a verb In the preacnt t«aae, the post tence, if formed regularly by tbo addition of d at ti, may bo cxprcaMid by the aomo algn ; thui, ^ noolltc*^, /\ rfmwK-af. In such caaca the context may generally be rdlod upnn to determine the time of the action ; if ncccnory, however, the aildltlunal aonod of the paat tenio may bo exproiaed either by halving, or hy n dinjoined /« or dtc; thus, Bid* belitved, F'-B!T pubKtkid, \| laljteud. Tbii nda may alio bo extended to a few wordi that are written wiih unconmcied ontlinea, but whoso pnit-tonse ilgni preient unoinal difllctdliea : Ihoa, Pr*-«Wd /wwadtd, Df dal»-d, Tim noMAh or houmi. ^ 2M. When a noon la written with a word-sign or contraction, the pSnral la formed, as in the ordinary way, by merely adding the «•■ drde to the oontnurted outline ; thus, /\ repreiaUatiM, /\ rtpramt TUB FOMBBirS OASC 01 SOURS. ^ 295. The poasearive case of nouns, whether written with full or eaatnu:ted ontlinea, is formed by adding the encircle ; or, if the nom ■native ends with the orarde, by enlarging it to (ii; thus, %_f ma'i, TUIBD rEBSOH SnODLAIl OF VBBM. § 296. Tbe third peiBoa ringnlar of reepilar verba in the indicative Bomid, present tense, that are written with word-^igns or oontracttons, is also formed by adding the en-dnde ; thns, come, _• eomet. aum ann vok Anncnrs uto advbw, §SB7. Hie same sign may be used flw the adjective and adverb wbeb the latter is derived irom the former by a6Bxing /y ; thus, J generat-lg. When the /jr is written, it shotdd be disjoined ; thus, Jnt'iZ gtntlammtg. PHEASEOGEAPHY. 99 PHRASEOGRAPHY. § 298. The learner has now had pi-esented to him all ihe steno- graphic material used in Phonography. He has also been made ao- qaainted with the feet, that in practice the signs of the vowels are selciom expressed ; so that, in great measure, they may iereafter bo excluded from consideration, and his attention directed to the conso nants alone. Thus far, however, the consonant-signs have bjen- usei to represent the consonant-sounds, hoth singly and in groups, as they are found in separate words only ; and it yet remains, therefore, to ex- lend their use to theTepresentation of groups of consonants a* they occur in phrases, or collections of words. , This mode of writing, by which the consonants of several words are joined or grouped in' one charao ter, is called Phkasbogkapht. ,TW0 KIXDS OF PHKASES. §299. Therearetwo ways of forming phrase signs; the simplest is to merely join the phonographic outlines of two or more words together without altering the form that each, would have if written by itself, and is exactly like joining words in writing ordinary long-hand ; thus, L/ which were, ^~f may as well, --------■■„- in any case, etc. The other mode of phrase-writing, and the only one which requires extended explanation, is to group together, by means of the stem-signs and their various modifications, the consonants of several words, without regard to the form of each individually — a portion, and sometimes all of the words, as it were, losing their identity of outline; thus, "hi by all their. § 300. The following is a statement of the power of the diiFerent consonant modifications, or attachments, when used in phrase-writing, and in the precise order of their introduction on the preceding pages of this work. CIRCLES AND LOOPS. 'as,' 'has,' 'is,' 'his,' ok 'us' added by the ess-cikcle. § 301. As, has, isj or his may be added bptli initially and finally, and us finally, lyr the ess-circle ; thus, °) as so, | has done, y^ is in, --- who has or is, y/ where is, J so h-as,K^for ns, A- see us. § 302. An ess-cirde word-sign is prefixed to a word commencing with Ihe circle, or suffixed to one ending with Jt, by enlarging the circle into ss; thus,, p hassaid, -^isseen, ^^-^hassome, ^ raisetis, ■-f^- gives us, v_^ hnoxsus, ^ as his, 6fas is, v.- is as, or his is. ^ ■''■ ' ' ' n 100 THK OCniPLBTK mOMOO BAWIK B. C^CTIOX IS KKOAttD TO ' C«.' ^ see. Ut, when added by the cirde to toiIm, will somotimcs oonllict with another fonn of the Terb, aa ^i'm-w with yioat , ;iirt-iM with fit, etc., and ihoald theteTora be used cautiously in sach caMS ; and when in doal>t as to its safely, the writer should employ the stem S. *30,' ' rr,' OR *THB' ADDKD HT CBXNOIKO TBB CIBCLB to a SMXtl. LOOP, % sot. To, it, or Ike may bo added to any of the eM-cirde word-signs, either at the commencement or end of a phraae, or when standing alone, and also at the end of most words ending with the circle, by changing it to the smaU loop ; thus, ( , in S9me. The outline of the word to which in is'thus prefixed should always be written in its proper position, instead of following that of in^ 'have-' OE 'of' added by TBB Er-HOOK. ■' § 312. Have or o/" may be added by the e/'-hook ; thus, \i part of, [ out of, I what have,'^^ can have, (^ they have, ^-^ may have. The e/'-hook on curves should be made larger than on straight stems. 'and,' 'an,' 'own,' 'been,' OE 'than' added by the EN-HOOK. § 313. And, an, own, been, or than may be added by the, en-hook; thus, .../r.. you and, -U-. if an, K^for an, "^ or an, "^ her own, ^^^ have been, d other (han, ^^^ more than. It is allowable to turn a small hook for n on the inside of the fer-hook, or of the wee-hook on curves ; thus, /^ rather than, (3 they have been. The phrase my own is written M'-N to distinguish it from Mn' mine. 'THEKE,' 'tHEIE,' 'they are,' OE 'OTHEe' added by THE ter- HOOK, AND BY LENGTHENING. § 314. There, their, they are, or other may be added by the ter-hooV, and by l^ngtheuing , thus, J what there, ^ can there, l^ of their, _J shall there, '^" should there, ■(■■though there or though they are, "vl if their or if they are, ../TT. will there, ^^^^^..from their, ^ — " on their, v no other, .^^^^. in there, y . ^ among their, ^ — ^ may oiher^ f loan their, ^--'^ run there, .^^^ could have their. § 315. As the words other and- their would sometimes conflict if writ- ten ahke, a distinction is made when necessary by putting the short second-place dash-vowel u after stems to which other is added as in the preceding section; Full information' on this point is given under the word other in the Dictionary of Practical Phonography. 'the,' 'it,' 'had,' or 'to' ADDED BY HALVING. § 316. The, it, had, or , why:iJi.e,f-yefthe,y.-iiJiad,\alhto, \ ought to. 103 TUE OOlfFLETB rUONOOBATlIBB. 'Arn»' ADDED Vt TOB EF-BOOK ASO LKHOTUKNUtO VllUICU'I.a. ^ S17. A/ttr may be added by the e^-book and lengtbcnlng principle combined; thoa. Dftr»-D dag mJUr dag, Bf'-/iftr bfftrt w ^fUr, M-N-Dftr*-Nn IfowA^ aJUrmum, Yftr'-Y gmr t^ttr gaar. ■axotobr' added bt tbb k!i-hook ahd ucmothbhivo rBMOirue. ^ 318. AmoUktr maj be added by the aa-hook and leiigtheidng prind' pie comlnned ; thna, "*Sv but anotAer, y^ when anetktr, .^T..^/'*" oaoCiar. ' m' ADDED BT TUE BALTIKtt riMKOIPLK AKO B8S-CIBCLIi. ^ 819. lit may be added by the balving principle and eM-cirde com- bined ; Uiaa,Vu' o/iU, Tu* at iu, Nta* on iU. 'hot' ADDED BT THE BK-HOOK AMD HALTINO PHIRCIPLH. ^ 820. Not may be added by the en-hook and halving principle oom- bincd ; tbua, J had not, j do not, -j- did not, ,.'7, con not, ^ may net, "i' it miU not. COMBIIIATIOS or FOBEOOIHO FBIKCIPLBa. ^ 821. The Coregoing prindplei of pbnue-writing may be uiod in eofflbinaiion with each other, aa well ns lopanitoly ; tliiu, ,^, can all of, *-* co« aU of tAo, ^ can all thdr, _^^_ can all tkiir own, X. do gam meoH to tag. W0BD8 WBITTES BT AX IXITIAI. AMD VIXAL UODIFIOATIOir Ot TUB rBECEDINO BTEH. ^ 333. In phniaei, sometimes a word !• bat written by an Initial hook and a final modificatioD, on the stem of the preceding word ; thus, Q leAal wai, y at one POSITION OF PIIUASE-8IGN8, ETC. ^ 333. As a general rule, the fint word of a pbraae-dgn should be written in the position it wonld occnpy if written try itaeli^ and (be other words then joined, one alter another, without regard to pcdtiim ; thus, f^ at mine,^^ kat not, ^ii not. EXCEFTIOHa. \ 32i. When the first void of the phrase bebngs to the first pod- tion, and is represented by a drde, loop, horizontal stem, or any half- length stem, if neceaaory to secnre greater legibiUty, the first word may be raised or lowered so as to allow the second word of the phrase to be PHEASEOGEAPHT. 103 * written ia the position it would occupy if standing alonfe ; thus, i lias had, _J as shall, _^ as show, p. as if, ^ as will as, "03"' "s soon as, f as to that, ^ as to them, .fS\.. as it would, ''~Q on those, "rrf.. on this, ? about those, --K- about this. CERTAIN ■WOEDS DISTIKGDISHED. § 325. It will be observed that sometimes two or three words are written with the same sign, being distinguished, one from the other, only by di£fei'ence of position. Now, it is obvious that, in phrase-writing, this mode of distinction can be preserved vrith such words, only when tliey commence phrases. Therefore, when the context can not be relied npon to show which word was intended, in case the sign is thrown out of its proper position, the writer must mate a distinction in some special man- ner, as by vocalizing, or changing the form, of one of the conflicting words. Por instance, K and Knt may always be used for can and can not, even when, in phrases, they are removed from the first position ; thus, T^-K-B it can be, T'^Knt it can not. But K and Knt must not be used for could and could not unless they stand alone or commence a phrase — it could be is written T^ K'-B ;. and it could not, T' Knt' or '^'-Kd-Nt. When it is more convenient to join could, did, should, or that to a preceding word than to disjoin, they should bewritten respect- ively Kd, Dd, SHd,DHt; thus, DH^Dd they did, T^-SHi-B it should he, N'-DHt on that, F'-DHt if that. Generally, however, it is best to disjoin could, did, and should, and to join that to the preceding word. DH for them may be joined freely in any part of a phrase. Had and do may generally with safety be written D in any part of a phrase ; but if there should arise any conflict, do should be disjoined, leaving the field to had. When the words no, go, own, else, least, see, ill, are joined to a preceding word that is written with a stem-sign, they should always be vocalized, to distinguish them respectively from any, come, know, less, last, say, well. Write T'-Lst at least to distinguish from T'-Zst at last. See is never used for are except alone or commencing a phrase. When are is joined to a preceding word, the iteraj^ or the r-hook is used ; thus, DHr°-E there are, DHr" they are. li for were may be used in any part of a phrase. If change is tlirown out of position, as by to in the phrase to change, write it CH-N-J; but write CH' for to charge. Part is joined freely in phrases ; when more convenient, it is occasionally ' changed to Prt; thus, N'-M-Prt on my part. O/iportunity should al- ways be written V' and alone. Certain words are written out of the position of their accented vowels in order to avoid collision with other words — in the following list the conflicting words are put in paren- theses :. 3" advantage (joy), Ndhr' another (no other), Gdhr' altogether 104 TIIK OOUPUCTB mONOOBAI'inCB. (agun), K* amg (no), D* dt (did), F* far (of, form), Jnt* gntUmau, (geaUemen), G> go (come), H* A* (me), 11* Aim (whom), Dllr* otltn (thdr), Vr* ocer (veiyX N' «»» (know), Tr* Imt* (trno), T* wkat (at, ont), CH* »A»e* (each), Ts* gountlf (use), finncfy is writteo in an^ pan of a phraae, bat tytlem, except when standing alone or commenc- ing a phrase, is written ssT-U. Jmur should always be vocaliied, to dialingnish it from near. Always carefully Tocaliso Itm*, to distinguisb it fivrn live. 'KTEB' and 'UATB' DISTINOCUUeD. ^ 326. Eeer as a word-sign, whether standing alone or oied In pbraiei, ■bould always fa« written with the stem V, to distingaiih it from Aom, which, in phrases (except at the commencement), is written with the c<«- hook ; thus, \do gou tver, 1^ do you havt. But tver ni a suffix may he written with tlie cee-hook. See ^ 285. TICKS FOR 'l,' 'a,' 'mi,' and 'aKD.' ^ 827. The words /, a, an, or and may bo joined by a light tick, the poaitioa of which is goremcd by that of the word to which it is io ot- tached — as follow* : 1. /, in any part of a phrase— by a light tick strudt In the diroctioii of cither res or cAoyi according to which gives the best joining ; thns, 'N '^ hopt, .fi^.. J belitM, \, /strfpow, f / toughl, f^_, I kaaw, .^ / am, ^^ am T, "Ks^^ if I ma]/. Before the signs lor can and could, (be npwaid tick is nsed, to avoid collisions with other outlines. S. il, on, or and, at the commencement of phrases— by a light tick written invariably in the direction ot pees thus, ^ and then, y^ and mg, >r>^.. and we, \^ and at/or. This hook is not nsed unless it makes an easy angle with the following stem, the dot being preferred in other 3. In the middle or at the end of phrases, a tick Inclined in either du«ciion may be used for either an or and (when it cannot be written with the a-hook), or fat a; thna, ""V^ lecne and icorte, ._;.. in a, Ftr'- (tidc in direction of eA,,_^ words of my text. 'of' FOLLOWED BY ' COm' OE 'CON.' § 335. When o/" precedes a word commencing with com or con, the of may be indicated by proximity and the dot used for the prefix. In practice, however, the dot may generally be omitted with safety. 106 TOK OOXPLETK FnOSOOBAPUEB. *TO' OK 'too' OimTBD AKD IKDICATKR BT A FOORTR rOIITIOW. ^ 33C. At the eommencement ofa phnM, either l« or loo may g■ll•^ ally be indicated by dropping the form of the sniM^tading word one half the length of a (e<-6tem beknr the third position of the same form ; thn*, I to da, 'Si_, to b« ttm, '^ to rocriw, .j to lrad§, ^ (op good. It a word ao wriitcn in the fourth position begins vitfi erai or eon, the pre- fix may be indicated by proximi^ ; thus, D' ifln* had to eompbdn. § 837. It is not welf to begin a sentence with a horiiontai or a half- length in the foorth position. In sach coses, the stem (m shonld be used ; thus, 1^- To me, etc 'rROM— to' omTTBO. ^ 338. From such phnwee as ' flrom hoar to hour,* * from week to week,'ett.,/nDai — to may be omitted, and intimated by writing the signs of the rq)oated word near each other, or, when more convenient, by Join- ing them ; thus, 1 1 /rom ihg to dug, 'f7!T7^. /'''"" '''"' '" ''*"• R'-B/vsi Kour to hoar. 'axd' ouittbd. ^ 839. And may occasonnlly be omitted from the middle of a phrase, and the adjacent words joined, especially when they are the same word repeated ; ih^*, Gn-Gn 090^ and ttgain. RULES FOR PHRASE-WRITING. OBIfBRAL BVLES. % 840. Words that are naturally collected into a phrase or danse in apeakiag may generally be jdned in a phrose4ign in writing; tbos, 'ss- well-aa,' 'in-the-flist-plaoe,' 'on-die-part-of-the,' ' on-the-other-band,' etc. But then should be no straining after phrase-writiag at the ex- pense of intrododng indistinct or difficult joining*, awkward ontlines, or phrase-signs thut are of inconvenient length, or that extend too fitr away from tlie lineu And words should seklom be jmned that ate sepo^ rated iu speaking by a distinct pause, either rhetorical or gmnmutioJ. ^ 811. Fhnses may be composed enlirdy of contracted words, or of words that are not oontiacted, or of contracted and nnoontnicted words mingled. So that for the purpose of making phnues, it is unnecessary for the writer to think whether the words entering into the constmetion of any phrase are contractions or not. SPBCIAI. BULBS. ^ 343. A noon or pronoim in the objective case may be joined to the preceding verb or prepodtion by which it is governed ; thus, ' take-tbis,' 'savc-them,' 'by-them,' 'for-him.' If any qmdifying word or word* f^r^S"; PHEASEOGBAPHT. 107 intervene, they may also be included in the phrase; tlius, 'at-the-time,' 'on-the-part,' 'for-my-sake.' § 343. A verb mAy be joined to its nominative, especially if it is a pro- noun; thus,''I-see,' 'he-lives,' 'they-make,' 'we-look.' If the verb -has any auxiliaries, they, together with any intervening adverb or ad- verbs, may be joined to'it, and the whole joined to the nominative ; thup, 'I-may-be,' 'I-may-not-be,' 'it-can-not-be,' ' James-will-not-go,' 'I- raay-again-return.' i ^ 344. A qualifying word may be joined to the word it qualifies ; thus, 'good-man,' 'a-great-many,' 'very-certain,' 'quite-likely,' 'arman,' 'much-esteemed,' 'as-good-as,' ' absolutely Tneeessary.' § 34i3. T,wo nouns, or a pronoun and a noun, coming together, the fiist in. the possessive case, and the other denoting the thing possessed, may be joined, and thei whole joined to a preceding governing or qualify- ing word; thus, ' James's-book,' ' on-the-father's-side,' ' on-his-pait,' 'on-their-side.' ' § 346. A verb in the infinitive mood, With or without to, may be join- ed to its governing verb, noun, or adjective; thus, 'ought -to -go,' 'I-desire-to-leave,' ' I-dare-say' (i-D-R-S), ' I-need-do.' § 347. A copulative conjunction may be joined to the word that fol- lows it, and also to the preceding word, if there is one in the same clause; thus, 'and-then,' 'you-and-I' (Yn'-i), 'worse-and-worSe.' § 348. When the idiom of the language requires, tliat one word follow another, if in the same clause, they may be joined ; thus, ' other-than,' 'more-than,' 'such-as.' LIST OF rilRASES. § 349. The following is a list of phrases that will be found nsefiil to the reporter. Most of them are forme'd regularly, according to the usual rules for phrasing ; but several are contracted outlines, that do not contain all the;elements of the words as they are written when standing alone. The list should be thoroughly -Studied.,_ A. about that, Bt'-DIlt about this, Bt'-DHs about which, Bt'-CH absolutely necessary, B'-s£t-Nss-iJ aqcbrding to, Krd' act of Congress, Kt'-Grs act of Parliament, Kt'-Pr-X acts of Congress, Kt'-sGFi'S acts of Parliament, Iv t' -sl'r-/j after aTan„Ftr'-('a' tick) after all, Ftr'-L again and again, Gn^-Gn all suoh, Zs'-CH all that, i'-DHt all the, it' - all their, idhr" along their, L"-NGdhr alongside of, L\-NGs-Dv although there is, X'-DHdhrz among the, NGt" 5* 108 TUE OQ>a*i.ErrE moKOOBArnEB. among diair, NGdhr* ■nd ao forth. Nds>-F-TH anjbodf.N^Bd any mcHre than, N'-Mm any one elan, M'-Wn-La any thing dae, N*-NG-Lb •ny thing kaa, N»-NG-I« iuethe,jRi' are there, Alhr' are yon, ii^* are yon awnra-Ry '-Wr are yon sure, Ify'-SUr ta eoriy aa, mSP-I* atUtas, tF'-Ba aa br as pofriUe, iF'-Bs-Pa as good u, sGdi' aa great aa, sGrts* as it were, atfi* as huge ia, iJa' as long as, ^Gs' as soon as pooible, laNt'-l'i at all evonia, nT^.Nts at any raw, T'-Srt atla8t,T'-z;at M least, T'-Lit at onoe, Tnrns' atone,T«n* at or about tiiat lime, Tri-Bt>DHt> T-M at imaent, T'-Pn-Kt nttfaat,T'-DBt atthe,Tt' B. bank neeomit, B'-NG-K-K-Kt Baptut <%nitli, Bu'-Ch-CH be able to, B*-BIt before aadafter,Bf*-('and'-ticIc)-Ftr before or after, Bf*-Sfa before thdr, Bitlhr* best of my knowledge, Bst'-H-M-J betweaithe,Xnt' between fiieir, Tndbr* book account, B'-K-K-Nt Britudi America, Brt*-M-i^K bat it is not, Bts'-Nt by and by, Bn'-B ty the 17, Bt' B* eanbe,K-B* a can yon state, Kys'-Tt Cathdio Bishw, K-TH'-B Oaiholie Charah.K-l'H'-CHr-CH CaihoUe Priest, k-TH>-Pnt Conatitatioii of the U. 8., '•stTdin'- codd you stale, Kys'-Tt Court of Chanceiy, Krt*-CH-)iJi Court of OotmnoB Pleas, Kn*-N-Pl* Court of Justice, Ert*-J-al!ri Courts of Justice, Krts»-J-i^ Court of Sessions, EjUsAm* Court of Geaeral Sessions, Kn*- JnuAat Court of Special Sosiioui, Krts'- PssAas D. Dear sir, Dr'aB defendant's counsel, D'-sKi-L deputy sheriff, D'-Pt-SUr-f dla you have, Dyv* did you have any thing, Dyv'-X-NQ do you recollect, Dy'-« do yon remember, Dy'-M dniing the, Drt* during tlie latter part of tlio, Drt'- Jttr-Pvt E. Eastern States, Strs'-Tts eight or nine, T*-i2-Mn eight or ten, T*'A-Tn Kpiscopol Church, P'-sK-CIIr-CU ct cetera, T'-sTr erer since, Ys'-lft everlasting life, V*-L§-L-W every wher^Vr-S F. Fellow citizens, Fls'-Tus first idaee, Fs>-Pb five or seven, Pv'-iJs-Vn five or dz, Fv'-jBs-B« five or six yeata, Fv*-llli-Kt-T> for ever and evw, F*- V-V for instance, Fs'-Tns for my part, F»-M-Prt for several, Fs'-V for the purpose, Ft'-P for the pniposes, Ft»-P« PHEASEOGEAPHT. 109 for Ijie sake of the, Fts'-Kvt four or five, I"-fi-F-V G. Gentlemen of the Jury, Jnt'-J-2J Great Britain, Grt'-Brt Great Britain and Ireland, Grt"- Brt-/Jlnd great while, Grt'-Wl great deal, 6rt'-Dl H. had another, Dndhr' had there been, Ddhr'-Bn had you, Dy' had we, Dw' have been there, Vndhr' here and there, Endhr' he was, H*-Z he' was not, IP-Z-Nt he was there, H"-Zdhr Holy Ghost, H'-Gst Hon. gentleman^ Nr-Jnt' Hon. gentlemen, Nr-Jnt" Hon. member, Nr'-M Hon. Senator, Nrs'-Ntr House of Commons, Hs'-K Hquse of God, Hs'-Gd House of Lords, Hs'-idz House of Parliament, Hs'-Pr-L House of Kepresentatives, Hs'-iJ- Ps Houses of Parliament, Hzz'-Pr-£ how do you do, H'-Dy-D howfar,H'-Fr how long have you been there, H'- NG-V-Yildhv how much money, H'-M-CH-M-N in consequence, Ns'-Kns in consideration, nsDrshn" in effect, N'-F-K in fact, N«-Ft in full, N'-F-L in order, Nrdr' in point of feet, N'-Pnt-Ft in referehcej W-Mi in regard," N'-i?-Grd in relation, N'-iJlshn in respectj W-Rs-Ft in response, N'-5s-Pns in that, N"-DHt in the first place, Nt'-Fs-Pis in the next place, Nt'-Ns-Pls in the world, Nt=-iJld in your direct examination, N'-Y- Urt-sM-Nshn it is said, Tzs'-I) it is the, Tst= it is well known, Tz'-L-Nn it may be said, T'-M-Bs-D it was not, Twz'-Nt it will not be, Tlnt'-B Jesus Christ, J'-sK just after, Jst°-Ftr just now, Jst''-N-[Hpright tick] E. Kingdom of Christ, K=-Krst Kingdom of glory, K'-Gl Kingdom of Heaven, K'-Vn L. Ladies and gentlemen, X'-Dz-Jnt last will and testament, Xs'-Z-T- sMnt learned counsel, Zmd'-Ks^L learned friend, Zmd''^Fnd learned gentleman, Zrnd'-Jnt learned judge, Lrnd°-J-J M. Member of Congi-ess, M'-Grs Member of the Bai% M=-Br Member of the Legislature, M"^Z-J Member of Parliament, M'-Ft-L Members of Congress, Mz'-Grs Members of the Bar, Mz°-Br Methodist Church, M-THds=-Cn- CH Methodist Episeopal Church, M- THds'-Ps-CH-CH more aOd more, Mr'-Mr more or less, Mr"-is Mr. Chairman, Mr-CHr'-Mn 110 ■niE OOStPLKTB rilONOOOAFIIER. Mr. I'resiJenl, Mr-Prm'-Ehu Mr. Speaker, Un-V*-Kr Mt dear brethren, M-I>r*-Bni Mr dear friondis M-I>i*-Fn' North Guolin, NH-Kr-X-N Monhem Stale*, Nrdbrt'-Tu nothing elie, N-TH*-NG-U nothing lew, M-TU*-MG-Xa objected to, B*-T objeciioa tintained, Ba'-Tud of anotlier, Vndhr* on his part, Mt'-I* on my part, N'-M-Prt on one or two occationt, M'-W-2(r- T-Kshni on or after, NH-Ptr on or before, NH-Bf on Uie other, N'-DUdhr on tboe occaaiont, N'-Z-Kilin* once or twice, W»'-R-Tw» once in a while, Wsi-N-Wl oneorbolh,W»-Nr.B-TII oneortwo,W*-Ni-T onr own, y&i' P. part of their, PTdhr* peculiar ciraunstancea of the caae, P^Ka-Tnas-Ka per annum, P*-iZ-N-H per cent., P*-/Za-Kt per minute, Pr*-Mn-T personal esUte, Pn*-Mb-Tt phonographic sodetr, Fn'-Kaa-T idaintiffa oonnael, F'-aKa-L or Plt*- point of view, Pnt'-V Presibyterian Cburdi, Pn*-CH-Cn l>re4dent of the U. 8., Pn'-Dnt-Ya a real eetate, TUs'-Tt re- crow- examination, iP-Kr-iM- Nshn ie-direct-«xamina(ion, iR'-Drt-aH- Nshn Itoman Catholic, 72*-K-TM Itoman Catholic Church, IP-K Til- CUr-ClI 8. Savioar of the world, iV*-iBd Sec'y of State, sKni'-Tt Sec'y of the Treaiury, »Krt*-l» Sec'y of War, •Krt«-Wr Senate of die U. 8., «Nt*-Yi lis or eight, iK'-iA-T six or seven, iK'-sAs-Vn so far as you know, S'-F«-Y-N so to speak, Su*-P Southern States, snils'-Tti state of facts, stTv'-Fts 8unday-«clu>ol, sN-Ds*-Kl the other, Dridlii-* tlien there was, Dllndlir'-Z three or fbnr, Thr'-jR-F-R two or three, IV-THr U. under alt the circumstoneei, Ndr*- Lds-Tnsz nnder the circumstances, Ndrs'-Tnss under the circumstances of the case, Mdrs'-Tnsz-Ks United States, Ys* V. 8. of America, Ys>-H-iZ-K U.S. Senate, Y*s»-Nt - U. 8. Senat(H-,Yss>-Ntr V. Tery likely, Vr»-Z;-Kl Tcry seldom, Tr'-sLd-M Vice-President, Vs'-Fc-Dnt Tice versa, Va'-V-S yvra, Toca^ V'-V-S PHKASEOGEAPHY. Ill w. was he not, Z'-Hnt Ways and Means, Wz'-Mnz well, sir, Ls'-R we have, Wv^ what was, Twz^ what was done, Twz"-Dn what was said and done, Twzs^-Dn- Dn what vvas said and done there, Twzs -- Dn-Dndhr what took place, T=-T-Pls where do you reside, iJ'-Dy-iJz-D where was, Mv/z' where was that, jKwz'-DHt where was yoiir place of business, /Avz'-Y-l'ls-Bz-Nz which was, CHwz' with reference, UH'-iJf with regard, DH=-i2-Grd with relation, DH^-iJlshn with respect, DH°^iJs-Pt ■WordofGod,Wrd»-Gd Words of God, Wrdz»-Gd . words of my text, Wrdz"-Mt-Kst words of our text,Wrdz»-2i-T-Kst Y. year and a half, Yn'-F year or two, Y^-JR-T years ago, Yz'-G years before, Yz^-Bf years of age, Yz^- J years old, Yz'-Ld yes or no,Ys"-ZJ-N yes, sir, Yss° you are sure, Yr^-SHr Your Honor, Y'-Nr SPECIAL PHRASE AND WORD CONTRACTIONS, § 350. When a phrase or word, whose outline is of inconvenient length, occurs frequently in a particular case or subject matter, the re- porter, after, writing it once or twice in full, may oftentimes save himself considerable labor by extemporizing an abbreviation for it. Such con- tractions are generally best formed by omitting from the outline all but the leading and most suggestive signs ; attention also heing given, in the selection, to ease and convenience of junction. Thus, for instance, in reporting legal proceedings, such outlines as the following may be used : D°-Bs ' defendant objects,' Bss^-Tnd ' objection sustained,'Zs'-X-T-sMnt Mast will and testament;' in legislative or congressional reporting, Nr'-Jnt ' Honorable gentleman,' Nr'-M ' Honorable member,', l?rs'-Ntr ' Honorable senator,' Nr'-Jnt-N-Y ' Honorable gentleman from New York;' in sermon reporting, £'-J-sK 'Lord Jesus Christ, '.Tr^-NI-E 'eternal life,' H-Git 'Holy Ghost,' N-T=-sMnt 'New Testament,' etc. ; in reporting a lecture on Chemistry, Ntr'-sD 'nitrous acid,' Kr'-Bs-D 'carbonic acid,' Ks-D'-Hdr ' oxide of hydrogen ;' in a lecture on Anat- oniy, sP'-Kl 'spinal column,' G'-NG-P-TH 'ganglion ophthalmicum,' etc. Names of corporations and companies may also be abbreviated in the same way; thus, i'-Trs-K 'Life,& Tnist Co.,' sN=-M-Ns-K 'Sun Mutual Insurance Co.,"CH-Br-Rs '^Chamber of Commerce^' Ns-Nt-ifl=-D ' N. Y. Central Railroad.' These special contractions, though they may be perfectly legible in the particular subject 'for which they are made, should not, of course, be employed in general reporting. 113 TBB OOMPIJSTB PIKMruaBAPQni. PUNCTUATION AITO OTHER MASKS. § 851. The faDowing uo the paiict .,q. ..if AflTUUSK " « Daoqib .. ♦ DOUDU DAOOn.. •• t OENE&AL BEILIBXS ON FUNCTUATIOIT. Tm rEBioo. 4 852. In n^tid reporting the writer has no Ume to Indicate the minor pooKS, bat be shonid always marlc the fall stops. As to the mode ofdfrfng this the pnctioe of reporters is varied, some using the small crosi, or a modification of it lilu tills (y,); others the long sign giT«i in oar table as the reporter's sign of taterrogation ; while many lue no mariu at all, bat indicate the paasea by spaces in their notes. If the latter mode be adi^ted, the space for a period should be abont three qaarters of an indi, and for a colon or sranicolon aboat a third or half an inch in length. In case, however, the reporter writes rather openly, the spaces shoold be correspondingly increased. ■xcLAMATioa an> DrmnoOATioa roona. ^ 868. The maria of e»!lamation and interrogation shonid hs written as shown in the table above, with the phonogt^ilo point at the bottom ; far, if made in flie ordinaiy way, with the simple dot, thej might be mistakea for j^urnqgraphic words. Both of these rigns sluMdd also be placed at the end of the cihmse or sentence whidi the) ate intended to marie It is recommended in most pihonographlc wwfcs that Uie intenogatian pcAnt be placed at the oommonoemeot ofOieintenogatian; biit,asitisfieqocnay!mpaadbletotdliriirtlMr PmrCTUAtlON AND OTHER MARKS. ' 113 a speaker, when he commences a sentence, is going to ask a question or make a simple affirmation, it is obviously impracticable in reporting to' follow this rule. Reporters use the long interrogation mark. -, . EA.BENIED)SIS AlO) BRACKETS. § 354. As the diference between the marks of parenthesis and thu brackets is not commonly understood, it is proper that their use should here be' explained. The marks of parenthesis serve to indicate that an expression is inserted in the body of a sentence with which it has no connection in sense or in construction, while brackets are generally used to separate, two subjects, or to inclose an explanation, note, or observation standing by itself. Therefore, the marks of parenthesis should be used to indicate a statement given in the words of the speaker, but which has no connection in sense or in construction with the adjoining matter ; and the brackets, to inclose any explanation, note, or observation given in the words of the reporter. DASH. § 355. The dash should be made double, to avoid its being mistaken, for the stem kay ; thus = ACCENT. § 356. Accent may be sho-wn by 'writing a small cross close to the vowel-sign of the accented syllable; thus; «^ arrows, ^' arose; but generally this mark is unnecessary-, as the position of the word almost always indicates its accented vowel. EMPHASIS. § 357. Emphasis is inarked as in longhand, by drawing one, two, or more lines underneath the emphatic, word. A single line under a single word should be made wave-like, to distinguish it from kay. CAPITALS. § 358. An initial capital may be marked by drawing two short parallel lines under the first part of the word ; thns,. .^t>. ?Vmes news- paper. The entire word maybe marked for capitals by drawing the par- allel lines under the whole of it. But as this mode of capitalizing oc- cuiiies too much time to te of practical use to the reporter, he may, with advantage, substitute a single line drawn under words to mark both proper-names and emphasis ; thus, A» James. Such line shoold, howcyer,. be made a little longer and heavier than a fey. 114 THE OOICPLETB FnOSOOKATnEB. INITIALS OF FBOPEB NAUB3, EIO. f S5B. TIm inltjak of proper names ara bMt wriUcB la loogtiaii I. U, howoTcar, phonogiaplue lettera ara uaad instaad, aa wQl aometiiaM be iiiiiiiwij Id tapld reporttog, sigiiB should be tolectod to i&dloata Iho WMwa. and not Oio fhtmefn^pUo, initiala. ooiooiiJLyr unriALa. ( 800. Tbe letter B., aa an initial, may Iw indicated hj tlie idiuiw' ■apb im,J).hjda, F. by cTi A by iWiy. X by ^oy, JT. by itoy, X. by let, Jf by an, JV. by m, P. by fM, 12. by h foy, and not jay, ibould be nied for the initial of inch namoa aa Oeoige, Oermany, etc., aa well aa of Qerrlt, OonTemenr, ete., tot gag indicatea the true initial 0., while /sy would indicate X. For a IUm reaaon fi, and not tf, ahould be uied for the initial of PhiUp, Fhflo, ete. V0W*L IXRIAU. ^ 862. The letter X, aa an initial, may be indicated by a heavy dot on the Une, if. by a heavy dot under the line, /. by the ilgn of the diphthong I written above tiie Una, 0. by (he word-ilga for om, and R I7 the rign of tlie dlphtliong wn written on or below the line. The vowel initiala ahould be indicated according to the above directlona without regard to their aounda ; thus, A. ahould be represented bf a large dot written on the line, wlietiier it be the initial of Abisham, Artirar, Alfred, or Angustna. Tbe vowel initials may also be indicated by writing the rigns of A, ?, i, 0, or bw to the nominal oonsonant. Tliis mode, however, ia hardly practicable in swift writing. mriAis or mus. § 863 The initiala of titles are best written with the longhaaa letten; thus, LL.D., M.D., A.B., etc. NUHBEBS, ETC. § 804. Knmliets shoold generally be rqnesented by the onflnory Aiabic diancteca. Tlioagji In some Inrfniicrt tiiey ai« not quite so brief as the words phonogr^tUcaUy written, they are aomeiriiat noit logiUe, and ihdr distinctive character renders tliem oonqtlcMmi tai s AW'' '^ PUNCTUATION AND OTHEK MAEKS. 115, page of notes. But one and ten are written best with Wn arid Tn ; bat if the figure 1 is used it should be written /" one, to distinguish it from, chny or jay. When several noughts occur in a number, instead of writing them nil, express the number, in part or in whole, in Pho- nography; thus, 800,000,000 by 800 M-Lxi\ 80,000 by 80 THz'-Nd, 35,082,000 by 35M-Zn' 82THz>-Nd, 10,000 by Tn«-THz-Nd. § 365. When a speaker mentions. a number of dollars or pounds, he first litters the number and then the denomination ; therefore, the epoiter should write the word 'dollars' (for which Ds' is a good abbreviation),, or 'pounds' after the number, instead of going back and placing before if the sign $ or £ ; thus, 421 Ds', instead of |421. PHONOGKAPHIO FIGDEES. 363. Numbers may, however, be expressed much more rapidly than in the ordinary way by using the phonographic consonant-signs with numerical values. The following assignment of thgm for that pur- pose is believed to present unusual advantages in point of brevity and legibility. i 5 6 1 8 9 "^ r / ^ \ ) / r / L \ ^ "^ 11 J tt (( (i o It It J tt (( It (f / 11 tt f tt (I § 367. The circles, and the d, er, ^, and en hooks may also be generally employed with numerical values. . But the loops, and the ijay, yay, shun, and Ur hooks, if used at all, should be very carefully written ; and, perhaps for general purposes, it is better to exclude them entirely. , Examples : f~ 5, ^-^-^ 83, (^ 87, // 64, / 47, \/ - 94, ^ 804, f— 407, \__ 908, r\ .509, _p 7,000, \ 95, N, 91, ^75,^74, J 12,^ 7,004. § 368. Before the phonographic numerals can be used in reporting, they must be thoroughly committed to memory and familiarized, par- tieiijarly the signs which represent the noughts ; the ess-circle standing for one nought ; the large circle for two noughts ; the large circle with a turned small circle for three noughts, and the stem ess, with an ini- tial largo circle, imd a final large circle with a turned small circle, for six noughts; thus, Ts = 10, Tss = 100, Tssb = 1,000, T-BsSsss=a 1,000,000. . 116 TOB OOXPLSTB raoauosikPHCB. FORMS MODIFIED BY MOTION. § Sfi9. Wo hare already eeea (§ 14) Uiat the ImA of tUe phow^ graphic oonaonant-dgiis ia tha segment of a cirde extending ninet; degiees, and a stimight line of equal length. Tlieao two chanotcn— • line of beanty and a Une of ipeed— vrittm in varioui diiectioni, with light and (haded etroke, and modified by moans of elrolM, loopi, hooka, etc, oonsUtnte the entire TMlety of phonogn^hlo word-forms, Cliaractcrs more simple or ciuUy drawn oon not Im devised. But when trsoed as aeeinBtely as may be with sldilful pen, with the rapidity of speech, the original geometrical figures appear modified, and fiUod with life as well as meaning. Phonography written, or engraTed as wo gen- erally see it, with an attempt at mathematical precision, in acoordance wiih Uio original geomcMcal derign, appears dead, stiff, and unwieldy, tMcanae it is unmodiSod by the spirit of motion. ^ 870. The principal movemimt in writing being forward, all indl mi or side morementa ore more or less sulx>rdIuatod to it. Bo tbnt all peipendiealar or partially bockward strokes will bo shorter than thoee written (brwaid horlson tally or inclinod ; and all words which wooid naturally extend tat aboTO or below the Une of writing wilt be (mmght more into Uneality by encroaching a little on the rules of po- dUan, and by makbig the phonographs smaller. § STL All horiaontol curves, instead of being segments of a circle, will be segments of on ellipse cut through its longest diameter ; this Ibrm bdng produced by the rapid forward motion which is of neees- dtj more retarded near the beginning and end of the stroke than Uirough the middle, while tiie apwoid and downward movements are eq^aaX throogliont, or, rather, retarded in the middle of the stroke con- jeqnenfrnpon the change of direction, upward or downward. § 372. Inclined cnrvos will be mora or less irregular, curving most near one end, according to tlie direction of ttie curve ; thus, <^and iik ore liable to be carved most near tlie I>cginning, and d and er, near the termination. § 37S. The modification of perpendicular curves is less apparent, but those convex to the right will be curved most near the beginning, ■ad those convex to the left carved moat at tlie lower end. § 874. b tlie j^ as the acceleration of qieed demaadt— ot>tusa w^es bdng made more acute by changing the inclination of IndinMl straight lines, or Iiy modifying the curvature of carves ; thus, ttie stem P, in the onUinea K-P will be nearer perpendicular tium wImb atoading alone, wliile in T-P it will be nearer horiaontol: aodVbaCm ON PEEPAEING COPT AND HEADING PEOOr. 117 P will be more curved, .especially at its termination, than when it occurs before CH. " § 375. At points of junction of two characters where a hook or cir- cle occurs, the characters- will display a sort of courtesy to each other, bending a little now and then from the original geometrical qreed. that they may form a graceful and neighborly union; for example, L be- fore Br will be more cra-ved than usual, while !F before Br will be con- siderably straighter. § 376. Shaded curves rarely have the heaviest portion of the shade precisely in the middle, bnt more or less toward one end, as the di- rection of the pen most favors the execution of a shaded stroke ; thus, the stems ZH, Z, NO, and W are shaded heaviest a little before the middle, and DH, V, H, and Y just after the middle. § 377. And as, by the law of mechanics, increase of speed must be attended with decrease of force, all strokes will be written as light as is consistent with proper legibility ; and, short- roads being sooner traveled than long distances, ,the reporter will naturally adopt as small a scale of penmanship as legibility will sanction. § 378. The foregoing statement is not in conflict with the directions contained in § 28, for the modifications caused by motion are solely the effect of speed upon outlines, and they will appear even when simple geometrical accuracy alone is aimed at by the writer. OlSr PREPARING COPT AND READING PROOF. § 379. Although the superintending of printing does not come within the strict duties of a reporter, yet when his reports are printed, it not unfrequently happens that he is called upon to take charge of and correct the proofs. In such case the following hints on the subject will be of use. PREPAEAITON' OF COPY. § 380. In preparing manuscript for the printer the first requisite ia to write it in a plain and legible hand; If proper names and foreign or tecnnioal expressions occur, care should be taken that they bo porrectly spelled and clearly written. The f's! should be dotted, and the i's crossed, which, in the haste of writing are too liable to be left imperfect. V Should be distinguished from /, particularly when they are used as initials, by bringing the former below the line. Words oi fientenoes meant to be printed in, CAPITALS should be marked by drawing three linos under them ; in small capitais, by two lines; »nd m Holies, by one. Should interlineations be made, or additions in 118 TnE OOXFLBTK rnOHOOBAJPBXB. Um nai^n, or on the ofipadta or • Mfuate Iwkf, Oie plam of faaartioi ■hoiiM be mariced with a onet, with • Una, if poaibla, leading btm it to, and inclaaliig the matter to be Inierted ; and if the addltlona] lamtter is dcagnod as a note for the fbot of the page, that hieU dionld also he stated ; patting snch or any other direction within a drote, tliat it may be readily noticed. No abbieriations of words or phraias bonld be nsed. The pont^oation dionld also Im carefViUy attmded to. And, at the oommenoomont of any sentence mooat to iMgln • tew pangraph, bat not distinctly exhibited as raoh, the marie (f ) ■ppnipriated for that porposo, should be placed ; for on no acoouDt ooght the paiagnj^tlng to Im luft to the oomposllor. FROOF-READINO. 9 S81. The following are the principal marlu used In oorrooUng proof-eheets. When it is desired to change a word to capital, small oapllal, or Italic letters, It shonld be undoraoored with three, two, or one Unes, aa directed in the last section, and the words eapi, ortli»s by ^Etm, wbleb bad roUod tho Irory cbsrloU of Uorlus sad and qT Si Cwsar bad Ions monldcnd into ivM. Tba laoralod £y, ftaesa,tba(«lden aaslea, lbs sbooUng l«glons,tlia mf^/t, . / 1 [ ti*cs, and lbs {iletarsd clUcs wcro Indood wantlDf tu ^ /^ / Us Tieiorloaa prooasslon. Tbs sosptrs had possod sway g 9 CmaltoBM. Bat sbs still ntsfaisd tba ralghUsrIaflttsneo 4^. €lt sn/finplia ^Btalltetari } sod was now to soa^tar Us x ^M. ffmtimi nwaid of an tateUcotoal tripipb. To ths mnn u I ,1,0 "ad eztandad lbs dombUon of bsr anelont Ungungs . /, —wk's.^"'' •na'a^Jbs tnipbios of pbllosophy and j^ Imsjlnalloa la lbs L baonts of IgnoraaecSsnd fwvaasy, JLat^ wboss eaptlTca wn« llio bo arts of admlrlnf taSSantl I enebslnad by tba Inflnencs of bis i , — 'Wboso spoils i^tha^lamal Clly S^/ \f herfratitade.V tarn ■b andent, and lbs In- *t wbo bad restored lbs ages of bnniaa drlUsatlon ^ On wicath vUdt i„bad dcserred " wboow^t^bbntbdrreflnsmsnt, — (ram ti^. ■ wbo owed to blm tbdr tarn* Kerer was a M O ss'iangnat witnessed by ytmlnstar or nbelms. ^ah. IfACACtAT, \ te*atta/im» MtJOtttiy ant^t^Lcay efU// ON EEEPAMNG COPr AND EEADmG TKOOF. 121 SPECIMEN ON OPPOSITE PAGE COEEECTED. § 382. When the corrections indicated by the marks in the specimen on the opposite page are made hy the printer, the result will lie »a giifon below. The balance of this page was, la Ikct, set up from a roof taken from the plate of the specimen. THE CEOWNDJG 0]? PETSAECH. NoTHiNC! can te conceived more o&ecting or noble than that ceremony. The Bnperb palaces and portlcoa by which had rolled the ivory chariots of Harins and Csesar had long mouldered into dust. The lanrelea fasces, the golden eagles, the shouting legions, the cap- lives, and the pictured cities were indeed wanting to (•is victorious procession. The sceptre had passed away &om Home. But she still retained the mightier inHuence of an inteUectual empire, and was now to confer the prouder reward of an intellectual triumph. To the mau who had extended the dominion of her ancient language — who had erected the trophies of philosophy and imagination in the haunts of ignorance and ferocity, whose captives were the hearts of admiring nations, enchained by the. influence of his song— whose spoiU were the treasures of ancient genius, rescued from ob-' Bcurity and decay— the "Eternal City" offered the just and glorious tribute of her gratitude. Amidst the ruined monuments Of ancient, and the infant erections oC modern art, he who had restored the broken link be- tween the two ages of himian civilization was crovracd with the wreath which he had deserved from the mod- ems who owed to him their refinement,— from the nucients who owed to him their fame. Never was a cora BsUon so august witnessed by Westminster or Rheii&s 123 THE CXntFLRTB PaOMOOBAPUEB. REPORTING. GEKERAL KEMARKa ^ 383. The two hwUng reqai«tM of the short-huid writing of ib« profaw kw l veriMUim repoKer ara ipttd—iho abiUtjr to follow a rapid ■iwafcer and catch and convey to paper every word that he attera— «od ttgiOBtg — the ability to write such rapid notes so legihly that tbey may be deciphered qoidily and without mistake. SPEED OF FBOSiOQBjirRT. ^iiSt. By speed of phonography is meant tiio rate at which one who U tborooghly fiimitiar with both iu tlieoi7 and practice con write it in ■och a manner that it may be correctly read without hesitation, and it is umoUy esUnuucd by the nombor of words so written in a minute. 'Jlie ordinaiy rate of public speaking is fh>m 120 to 130 words a minute ; an average of ISO words is quite rapid, and 175 to 190 1* very rapid, but few speaken reaching that speed, alihongh even that is occasionally ex- ceeded for short ^urte by eloquent or excited speakers. •PEED BBQOtSJtD OF AWAKOKMSeS AKD BKFOnTBItS. ^ 385. A phonographer who am vrrite correctly and legibly from 115 to 135 words a minute is competent to do most amanuensis work ; and one who con in like manner write ISO words is prapored, so far as his short-hand is concerned, to b^n verbatim reporting. A person who commences repotting with a speed of 150 words a minute, well written, may dqiend npon future experience and the Insplratioii of the moment to tide him aafdy over the passages that an spoken above that rate. tEOIBIMTT OF FHOKOOItAPirr. ^ 886. By lability of phonography is meant the certainty and ease with which it can be read after having been ra]ridly written with dU the little deviations from arithmetical accuracy timt usually occur in tiie writing done by a man of ordinary training and skill. Hie importance of legibility has been nnderesiimated by many, and it is too apt to be un- .nppreciated by I^men in their efforts to get qieed. In aU cases when phonography is used to record an author's compositioii, as employed by dictation amanuenses, phonographic seeretiuies, or, in short, tot any phonograpliic work except reporting pntdic speeches, the writer iso^ quently called npon to read over what he has just written, and he fOOtt be aUe to do so without oror in any word. The exactions from sborl- hand writns in courts now ate very much greater than they wen fbr- meriy, it being an every-day occurrence for them to be requited to Rod EEPOKTING, 123 in open eonrt their notes of testimoiiy ; ajid if they do not write a legible shon4iand, in a legible manner, they must fail. In many portions of the United States ofScial stenographers are employed to report the pro- • ceeding& of courts, and generally the accuracy of those reporters is im- plicitly relied upon by litigants and judges. Bpt instances hare been known where material and permanent injury has been done through the inaccuracies of reporters : and sa it should be the aim of all learners of phonography to. get, first, Accuracy; second, Speed.- Legibility in itself is an important contributor to speed, because it gives a feeling of confi- dence and certainty to the writer in regard to his work. TIME NECBSSAKT TO ACQUIRE SPEED. ^ 387. As to the length of time requii-ed to attain a speed of 150 words a minute, it is impossible to speak with certainty, as very much will depend, of course, on the natural talent of the learner, and the amount of time he devotes daily to the task. Tlie average amount of time necessary to qualify a tolerably expert writer to follow a speaker at that rate is from eight to twelve months, by practicing an hour a day ; or six to eight months, with two hours' daily practice. It will generally be found a comparatively easy task to increase the rate of speed from 1 00 to 130 or HO words ; but to go beyond this, much persistent practice will be required, and the progress from day to day will be less perceptible. The, very highest rates of speed can only be attained by those who have througli study and practice become so familiar with the outlines of the, great mass of words in common use that they can write them without hesitation the instant they are Spoken. MATEBIALS USED IS WRITING PHONOGRAl'HT. chineiy at the npper right-band comer, within the maiginal line, and fiir enough above the npper line not to interfere with the wrtliiip— the paging running on eontinnoosly, year after year. The sheet hos two columns for writing each 8J indbes vride. This style of paper is very convenient for rqMHien who have their notes transcribed by otheit, as the tran- scriber is enabled to commence worit as soon as a sing^ sheet of notes has been written, which wonU be impossible if a book were used. The author also takes this occasion to nige upon rqwrters who use his Prse- ticaT Huaiograpby, especially those employed in the profesrion of kw short-hand reporting, the advisalriii^ as fiir as possible of having thdr notes transcribed by othen. Transcripts so made riiould always be caopared witih the notes ; the reporter bdding bis notes, and the ttan- scriber leading aloud from the long-hand. Coirectiotts may be made at the time of such oompaiiaon, or they may be indicated on (be maij^n in paid], and tlien insetted in ink afkerwards. Some of the pnwf-readai's marks at { 881 wiA be fonnd nsefol in dmng this part of tbt woik. ^ 391. The rqiorter should always write Un » taUe or desk when one can be obtained, which is nsimlty the case in the courts. Tbei EErOETING. 125 reporter has, however, oftentimes to take notes while standing or sitting in the audience, and then the stiff covers of a note-book may be all npon which he" can depend for the support of his hand while writing. § 392. The phonographer should in his practice accustom himself to the occasional use of .both pen and pencil. For practical reporting there i.s nothing so effective as a gold pen, when a, suitable one can be ob- tained. The peculiarities of a gold pen to be used in writing phonogra- phy, to which attention should be directed, are the following: the nibs should be both straight and short, so that all of the signs, boti: light and shaded, straight and curved, may be quickly made with the least possible variation in the spring of the pen. Several of the pen manufacturers make what they call a short-nibbed pen, of medium size, from which the reporter can generally select a satisfactory implement for short-hand writing. As a general rule a pencil should be used when notes have to be taken upon the knee or when standing, but pen and ink when a table . or desk is provided. Various kinds of pencils are now in use, and each phoiiogi-apher should decide ibr himself which is best suited to his hand ; but probably more would be suited with Eaber's No. 3 pencil than with any other. A few reporters nse fine-pointed steel pens, but they are not iiecommended for reporting purposes, altliough they are very good for learners in writing their exercises. In order that a reporter may write with uniform speed and accuracy, his pen must be also in a uniform con- dition ; but steel pens are uneven in quality, and they are liable to cor- rode and suddenly fail at a time when the writer can not stop to replace them with a fresh one. LAW EEPOBTING. § 393. It is an erroneous though common belief that the, duties of a reporter are simiply to take down and furnish a transcript of all, and esaictly what he bears, and that the merit .of a report consists in i(s being an exact record of every word uttered by the speaker. The fact is tbat the exact words of an address are very rarely preserved. Of the great majority of even the better class of our public speakers, whether at the bar, on the rostrum, or in the pulpit, few are able to speak ex- teriippraneously in such a manner that they would be willing to see a verbatim report of their words in print. Their sentences must often beremodeled, and occasionally the wording of entire speeches may be said to be almost exclusively the work of the reporter. For this rea- son facUity of composition is a qualification of the greatest importance to him. - Good judgment is also absolutely indispensable — indeed, it iilcn -happens that a poor stenographer, with judgment, makes a bettor rc|v>i ter than a good stenographer, who lacks in that respect. Now, lUfe 126 TOE OOUPLKTR PBOmMBArnKB. u eipeeully die caae in Uw reportinK, beeaoM io dib, at In rU othoi legal mattan, ao much driieDda upon men fbnn. ilia jtrotaikaal law Importer dioidd be oonrenant iritli Hm ordBnaiy legal ftnni and exfnmiiam, parUcalaily thoee that ai« met with in triala ; and, if ha bappena to be himaelf a well-road Uwyar, It wlU enable Um to mak« all the better reporte. 9 891. The proper reporting of objections, moUont, and mltngt raqoirea more judgment and experience than any other part of thf lolief of the Uw rqwrlar. If oonnad would alwajs atote In w many «onb the grounds of their objectlona, little or no dUBoulty would be uxperienced. bat oRenlimca a long argnment Is made, ftt>m the whola of whkh the reporter Is obliged to eliminate the gist of the objection, and to pat it in proper legal j^raseology. It will not do to take down and write oat Just Um words of the ooonsel, for this would fluently render the report rvj vdnmlnoas, and at the same time subject the party who orders It to mudi unnooeasary expense. It would there- fore seem that some knowledge of the roles of evidence is an almost Indiquaiaablo quaUflcatitm of the law i^Mrter. Bat In the absence of more extended Inatmction in this rcapeot, the following Unti m«> be found serrioeable. ^ 833. When a wiiaesa haa been regularly sworn, he Is first exaat- ined by the party who produces Mm. lliis is called the " direct exam- Inatkm," or the " cxomhiatlon In chief." After that the other party Is at liberty to crcas-examhio ; and then the party who fltst called him may re-examine. This is called the "nHUroot," and, aeoording to strict rule, it cloaca the examination of the witness. On the re-exam- ination It is permitted to aak him any questions necessary to explain matters elicited from him In the "cross-examination." Out the re-ex- amination la not to extend to any new matter unconnected with the croas-examlnation, and which might have been Inquired into on the examination in dief. The strictness of this rule is, however, in Out discretion of the court, frequently relaxed. Further questions an uttentimea allowed to be put by tiie opposite counsel, especially mbea, on the redirect, any new matter has been drawn out. Tills b called the " le-cross-examination." § 396. The obligation of proving any bet liea upon the party who Bubatantially asserts the affirmative of the issue. The affiniative of most cases natoially rests with the plaintlll^ or piBty bringing the nction, and therefore it is that he proceeds fost and gives evUenoe to BoiBtantiala hla cbdm. When the jdriniiff has finished his airidsnoe, heresta, and flua sometimes defendant's counsel moves to dismiss the action on Hie ground that even if all the evidence adduced by Um plaintiff were admitted to be true, be would have no legal riglit to EEPOETTSTG. ' 127 leaover. If the motion is denied, which is generally the case when there is no jury, as judges generally prefer to hear the whole of a case before deciding any of its material points, the defendant's counsel excepts, and proceeds to produce his proofs. But if the court ^rant the motion, plaintiff takes an exception, and the trial ends there. Frequently the motion to dismiss is only made^ro/ornsa, to preserve, for the purposes of an appeal, any rights that may be covered by it. In such case the motion is denied without argument, an exception taken, and the trial proceeds. Sometimes, before the plaintiff produces any evidence, do fendant's counsel moves to dismiss the complaint on the ground that it does not state facts sufficient to constitute a cause of action. Xliie objection, however, is generally taken by demurrer, and not on' the trial. § 397. The order of proceeding in the trial of a cause is generally the following : (1) The impanueliug of the jury ; (2) the opening remarks of .plaintiff's counsel in which he states the nature of liis case, and in general what he expects to prove ; (3) the examination of plaintiff's witnesses ; eaiCh of which defendant's counsel" cross-exam- :nes, unless he waive the right ; (4) the opening remarks of defend ant's counsel ; (6) the examinatioji of defendant's witnesses; each of which is cross-examined by plaintiff's counsel, unless he waive the right ; (6) the rebutting testimony of plaintiff ; (7) ditto of defendant ; (8) the summing up or arguments of defendant's counsel ; (9) ditto of plaintiff's counsel ; (10) the charge of the judge to the jury ; (11) the ■verdict. In some courts trials are had without juries ; and sometimes, even when the parties have a right to trial by jury, they waive it and proceed before the judge alone. § 398. In ordinary civil trials the reporter has generally nothing to do with'the impanheling of the jury ; but in criminal trials this is a very importaiit matter, and should be carefully reported. It is alHvays well to take notes of the opening remarks of counsel, for, although they are seldom ever required to be written out, they will sometimes throw light on obscure or doubtful portions of the testimony, and enable the ^vriter to ascertain whether he has cor- rectly reported the language of the question or answer. Great care should be taken to report every word on the examination of wit nesEes ; and iA transcribing, their exact language, whether grammat- ical or. ungranwaatical, should be preserved ? and if any words are mispionpuuced, that fact should alao be indicated if possible. By thi,« Dfiestns, on an appeal, the judges will be able. to form a better ji'dg- meiit of the- weight that should be attached to the evidence of the reqieetive witnesses in the court below, than if all were made, by mtang Of corrections, to speak with equal propriety. The language of tho 1S8 THB OOUPLKTB PROKOOKAPIIER. (pMstkns of eomiMi, however, maj be freqoentl^ iraprand wiien it cut be done wiUioat intrododng any material alteraUoM. It h noi csoal to leport tlie mmmlDg up of the covnad, nnleai they npittAy « to the bot- tom of the sheet. Faper rated In this way, and which ia oommoniy eslled " legal-cap," nay be proonred at most itattoneia. It is gm eralty ruled on both Mm, and if both are written on, it is drae In thb wise : After finishtaig the flnt aide, the sheet is turned over endwise, and tlie second page Is written fkom the bottom to the t^ of the sheet This Is called by soriranan " baoUng" the p^^. It is tbe genersl practire of reportan to writa on one side of the paper only, bat someiimai it is pnHimd that both be used. As to tliii matter, tbs eonmel may be eonsnltad. The numbering of tbs pages should le in the m irgin, at the lower end of eadi dieet, tiie nginas on the flnt aide being plaeed at the bottom, and on tlia opposite side, at tiis U^ of tlie written paga. The paging is done in this way so (hat there will lie no dangw of the nnmben being ooroied up whm the sheets are pat together. The twtening together of the mannsoript is con moniy done with red ti^ie, or with small tin daqia made fiir the pur poae. If tape is nied. throe small hole*, about two inches apart, should first be puudied in ttw top nuu^sin of tbe paper, and the t»ft then drawn through by means of a long, blunt needle, wlddi diui Id be first pn» down through the middle hole ftom the front of the mao- ueciipt, then up through one of the ride holes, next down through the other ride hole, then up through the middle hole again, and the Olds tied acroes flu tape that ertoida fiom one ride hole to the other. Tlieae minute directions have been given beeaose so maay peofde have audi a very dorenly manner of putting together legal p^pera. If the trial of a case runs through aerenl days, the paging siioald be continued on oonaecutivdy, instead of commeudng hww eray day. Tliia will enable oonnad to ascertain wttbout ttortlt mIimUict Miy |iMt nf th« mimfrfpt U miaring 4 40O. The pn^er legal names by wUch the paitlee to as mUm aw W'^'^iWt'^ EEPOETING. 129 designated, vary in different conrts, and also according to the natnra if the proceeding. In ordinary courts for the trial of civil causes the party bringing an action is called the Plaintiff, and the party against whom it is brought, the jyefeadant. The appealing party in the New York Court of Appeals is called the AppeUant, and the other party the Eespondeni. All prosecutions for crime are brought in the name oi The People. When a proceeding is brought in private interest, but which must nevertheless be brought in the name of The People, as, for instancy, in election cases, a mandamus, or certiorari, the moving party is designated, The People on the relatifm of (or ex rd) So and So, giv itig the flame of the party for whose benefit the proceeding is brought ; and who is generally called the Rekitar. On a proceeding, for the probate of a will, the party offering it is called the Proponent, and the party opposing the probate, the Contestant. § 401. TTie first page of a report is generally used as a title-page, on which appears the name of the court ; the title of the suit ; the name of the judge before whom it is tried, stating also that it was before a jury, if such be the fact ; the date of the trial ; the names of, the counsel , and for whom they appear, and the index to the witnesses. The title-page is also an appropriate place for the reporter to write or stamp hisi business card. A new title-page should be made out for each day's report. The back of this sheet may be written on, or not, nccording to the taste or convenience of the writer. In the city of New York it has becpmethe custom of law stenographers to put . up reports of trials in covers, generally made of tinted paper of some kind, with printed blank forms on front and back. If covers are used, after the first day of the trial only an abridged title, with the date, need be put at the head of the report. The Index of Witnesses is written on the first page of the cover. ^ 402. At the commencement of the examination . of each witness sjiould be written in a plain and rather larger.hand than usual, his full name, commencing it just outside of the margin line, and underscoring the whole with one line. Then should be stated for which party he was called ; that the witness was duly sworn or affirmed, and the name of the counsel oopducling the ..direct examination. Each question and answer should be preceded, by the initials Q. or, .4., written in the margin, near the line. These letters should not encroach too, much on the margin, as it is required by counsel for their notes and references. Some reporters c,)mmence the answer immediately after the question, and do not place ilje A. in the margin at b}\. This is called " running in the answers." A line should be left blank above the name of each witness that is called, but not between the diregt and cross examination; and the following , beading .:shpuld be written on a line by itself: ^Cross-examination by teiSife,:- 130 THE oouruETB PHcnrooBAPmB. Deft's (or TWi) eomisel,' or 'by Mr. So and 80,* Having tlra eaamwri tiame. It, in the conm of an examination hf one ooonMi, a lingle qnettian la intennMd hj the other eoanaal, or by the Judge, die word* Bj PUumUg't Ctmrntd (or DtfmdmaX aa the caae may beX or 1^ Mr. & a«l Sai, or Ajr fA« CmtC should be written joat after the initial 'Q.,' wiiboot indentation, and in parenthesea. Shoald it be fidlowed by one or two more qoeitiont b^ the same party, the words Bg tkt mmt maybe in cl oe td in the paientlieNS. If, however, a ooosideraUe number of neh qneuioiM oeenr, the wordi Bg Plff"* (or D^'*) Ommid, or JBy Mr. So amd &, or i^ (A* Court riioald be written on a separate Um, and the questions then recorded in the ordinary w^y. When the orlgimil exam in a t ion is resnmed by the counsel who was thus interrupted, a simi- lar formuk may be u«ed to indicate it. ^ 408. liemarlw made by the connsol or by the Court, such as oljeoUou, nilings, exoepUona, motions, etc, should gennaUy b« written in the third peiwn, and the entire matter indented an inoh 01 mon fimn the margin line. If the Indented matter don not form a oompleta sentence of iiaelf, it should be tnoloaed in brackets. When the words of oounsel are given in the first penon, they should be pre- ««ted by the counsel's name, and then written lu the same manner as • i|neslion or answer, that fa^ without being Indented. The nam* need not be written In toSX, but moraly Mr. 80 and So, writing the Mr. Just outside, and near the naigtn line. The words fUMf* (or ZV fmdMt*) OaBHrf are aometlmea used instead. In dther esse they should be nndoiaoored with « single line. Bemorks by the Judge tnnaoribed In the fltst penon are written In ths same way, but should be preceded by the words Th* (hurt, uadenoorod. FORMS. ^ 404. The spodmen forms on the fultowing pages will servo as guides to the rqiorter in preparing rqxirts. In regard to the use of the tenses of tlie vobs in the indented portions of short-hand report, the practice of reporters varies ; some preferring the present tense, as in the follow- ing examples: " Plaintiff's counsel read$ in evidence," etc, " Mr. Jones cyieas for phuntiti; "" defendants' oounsd eto'ffls the right," etc. ; while oth- ers use tiro past tense, as follows : " Plaintiff's counsel read in eridenee," etc, "Mr. Jones qpemif for phiintiff," "defendants' cotmsel ebimtd the right," etc The author prefera genenOy die present fonn, because it gives greater freedcm and facility in the ounsthiction of itatemeiits^ and abw pennils of more condensation of expression. OceasSoBatly, howOTar, the past tense seems to be best| and it is not necessary that Ae reporter shoald con6ne himself oclusiTdy to eitlier. The perp^ndicnlar Una at the left of the pages rein«sents the maigin line of Iqgal-cap paper. UEPOETING. 131 rmsr page — boem 1. N. Y. Superior Court, Fart g. q: M Q. John Adolph vs. y. The Central Park, N. and E. I Eiver B. K. Co. J Before Judge Sedgwick and a Jury. New York, TSTov. 23d, 1 876. Appearances : For plaintiff, M. L. Townsend, Esq. For defendants, Vanderpoel, Green, & Cuming, Esqs. Mr. I'ownsend opened for plaintiff. nton Oveubetstdny called for plaintiff, sworn. Direct examination by Mr. Townsend. Where do you live ? A. I live at 334 East 22d Street, etc. FinST PAGE— POEM 2.. N. Y. Superior Court, Fart 2. Henry Martin and others } vs. 't Henry F. Angeli and anor. J Before Judge Sedgwick and a Jury. New York, April 10th, 1876. Appearances : For plaintiffs, Wm. H. Williams, Esq., attorney. Orlando L. Stewart, Esq., of counsel. For defendants, James M. Smith, Esq. Mr. Williams opened for plaintiff. arh.Finlay, called for plaintiff, sworn. Direct examination by Mr. Stewart. Are you one of the plaintiffs in this action? A. Yes, sir, etc. MEST PAGE — FOBM 3. R.'Y. Superior Court, Part 2. Louis Heidenheimer) vs. r David Mayer. ) Before Judge Sedgwick, without a Jniy. ■ New York, Nov. 17th, 1876. Appearances : For pl^ntiff, . E. W. Townsend, Esq., attorney, ,. A. K Dyett| Esq., of counsel. For defendant; ' , . . , . S. Kaufmann, Esq.; attorney; Lewis Sanders, Esq., of counsel. 6* 132 TUB ooumjETS moMoo&iPnKB. I FUinliir'i eoand offisn In •HdcnM lb* writim Kouuityoa which the aoiaiiiibraai^l. OlfjoeMd to on iha groand that dm* li ao proof of its omco- lion. Oljeciion orwraM ; «xr«pdaa takwi. Pa- par nuuked PUiniiff'a Exhibit No. 1 of thli due. Abo, ihs two prominory notes In rail; one of which ia wholl/ unpaid and the other only BMtkUy paid— with tlie protaita attached— maiked Ilain- tiff's Exhibit Kna. 2 and 3 ril lit and H 1874 — nuotod naiotUTi Esliibiu 4 Mid 5 of tblt data. Alao plainijini rqity to aamo— marked Flsintiff's EshUilt6 li«,Gi«en,AJonei7 (H^eMd to at a oondution ot hw. Do yon know the &ct that the flrm of Wiliit, Qreen, * Jonet had aeonttaa widi the ddbndaat in thli cate to lell and de- llf«r a catttin amonnt of carboya of oII7 (Mdaetad to as inmuuerial, being ru iuttr atioi acta. Oqactioa omnilod ; osoeiition taken. il. Oartafaily I do. aal oflbm to pniTe that dnilng the month of April ibb >rm of datbndanti bad oonlraeti and order* la lai|* qnaniitiea tliat thqr ware anable to tnpply. If r. R'Mtr— I woold IUm to mm than prare it, if they can. lyk Camii^l will lake the raqiontlbillty of ruling that out. Pbioiiir'a eoontal oflStn in evidence die papers ibai were ideniifled bv Mr. Morrii a* acoonnu re* eoidad hf bfan of add pnrehaaed by liim and paid ibr by ptainilff, 1 1 In nnmber. Marked PiaiDtlir '• lit No. 10 of this date. ON TAKING NOTES IN LAW REPORTINO. \ 108. It thoold be the aim of the reporter, while teJihig notet of a legid piweedlng, to stenograph the maUer in the same fimn tbat he widMt it to appear in when transeribed. By so doings espeeUlly in le. poftiag o lj ee t ions, mliagB, et&, he will save hlmsdf much time and iitMfale when be comes to the meet kbofions pert of his iMk, the making oflhehiag-JMiidiraaseript. And it is indispensably necessary when the reporter ha* his minatea tnnseribed directly from the short-hand notes, witlioiu dirts tioB arrabsei|aentniUonof tbenotes. WAM* or wrnnas, wk. ^ 409. At the caaaneneemeat of ceeh case its title should be (UBy written oat in loiv-taand, and there also Aonld appear, either in long- band or phonograpiiy (aeoordtng to the leiigth of time the reporter has to write itX the name of the eonr^.tfae name of die judge, whether or not diere is a jnry, the date of the trial, and the appearances. At the head of the rteminetion ofeedi witness hb name diaidd be written in ioog-band in foil, and foOowed by the words in pliaiiqgrsphy,"Kld'-VP KEPOETING. 141 (or P), sEn' Drt'-sM-Nshn B' Mr" — — ^." If the reporter is pressed for time, he may simply wi'ite a phonographic pee or dee, to indicate whether he was called by Plsiintiff or Defendant. QUESTION AND, ANSWER DISTINGUISHED. § 410. In notes of testimony it is the practice of most reporters to distinguish the question from the answer by commencing each lino ■A tho^ question at the left of the page, and indenting each line of thei iiswer about one third the width of the page ; thus, Where do you reside i reside in New York city Where were you on the night of the 28th of December when this affair oocurred I was at my house in 26th Street until about 8 o'clock, and then I went to the opera Although this mode of writing questions and answers (especially when they are short, only occupying a, portion of a line) takes up more paper than any other, yet this is more than counterbalanced by the increased distinctness that is given to the notes, and the greater ease and convenience with which the reporter is enabled to refer to partieular portions of the testimony, when, as is often the rase, he i^ called upon to do so by the counsel or the court. PASSAOES MAKKED FOR COREEOTION. § 411. When the reporter takes down a question or answer that he wishes to read over before commencing to transcribe it, in order to alter its arrangement or correct an error, he should mark it at the time l)y drawing near it a perpendicular line at the left of the page. CASES CITED. § 412. When cases are cited by counsel, and extracts read from them, the reporter need not attempt to write them at length. After sv-riting the title of the case, and the name and %lume of the Eeport where it is to be found, it will be suficient to give the. commencing ur^ concluding words of each period, with a long dash between. This will enable the reporter when transcribing to ascertain exactly what portions of the case were read and what omitted. BINTS ON TKANSCBIBING. & 413. Ordinarily the reporter transcribes his own notes into long- hand. This is the most wearying part of his duties, as it often takes seven or eight hours to write out what was taken in shovt-hand in one 142 Tm ocniPURK rnoHooBAivBB. hoar. An nqiariMeed reportar ihaQld be aUa to randar his noM of tmiatcnj into legible brng^aiid at the rata of aisiaaii to twenty folioa (afanebniMlmlwonUeeebjanhoiiriandnoiwof ai^BVUMOt, »|ieecbea, ate., at tbe rate of tea to sisteen foliae. ^ 414. \nMo eraat es]Mdiiioa it reqoired, note* may be tranierlbed bj dIetatinK «> two lapid Jonc-hand copyiua from diflbrent pam of ihf vtpoit at the aame time. In thia eaae one of the wiiteia majr oom< nenoe with the be^nninr of the cqxfft, and the other M the middle, devfaUing, howerer, a little to one aide or tiie other, when hf m doing be ia enabled to start with a new wttaa«, or at the beginning of a craa».«naUn«llaa. Hm reader ihould ait Iwtweon the oi^iili, and dictate a fsw woidi, flnt to one aitd then to the other, kooplng mo of tbe placet In his note-book with the Index ftnger of his right band, and the other pfawe with the Index Ungw of his left hand. B/ turn- ing the head a UUle, aa each aentenee ii diotatad, toward tbe writer for whom It b Intended, all danger of oonAidon will be avoided. ThJi alao may be done by calling eadi bj name every time bo it addtcaied. A little Ittgenvify ai^ pncUos will enaUe Uie reader to keep both wiiteit oonilaBtiy employed. In tbta manner of tranwribing, ttom thirty to forty fidiaa may be written oot per hour: and, If tbe oqqrlsti are careAil, the manomipt need not afterward be read over, or oimi- pared with the notea. f iU. Another mode of expediting thii part of the work bi (o dlo- wrte the matter to other phonogi^ihen, who then piooeed to tian- aetibe their notea. Fkirthbipnipoaeadvaooedloamenirf Phonography are generally employed, aa thqr «« wining to do the work for flio take of the praotioa it gives them, for a oompenaatbm that leportei* ean afford to give, lianaaarlpt prepared in thii way, however, ibould alwaya be eaieftally reread,, aa enon will oooMdonally ooeor. § 41S. There b another mode of tianacriUog, by whidi a r^ort can be gottoi oat very nearly, or qnlte, aa lut aa the original notes w«ra taken ; bat it can not be naed except in pr^aring matter ibr the printer, and it la periiaps well not to resort to it even for that, except whcieagreatanMinffof woikhastobe done in an nnnsaaUy limited ipsMe of time. Tbe i^ is aa follows : Having secured tbe aervicei of live or six nqpd long-hand writers, fbtf are seated about • r emd table, each having before him a jSle of slips of paper, previouify nam- liered— those before tbe first ecqiyiit bang marked 1 A, 8 A, 8 A, etc. ; tboee befine the aeoond, 1 B, 2 B, 8 B, ele, and so on. The nporter then eomm^iees by dictating a sentence or line to numbw one, then a like amount to number two^ and so on around the drde, untfl be comes to immbn' one again, and then conthnes ri^t on without braak. Tbe reader Aoold wdk around the table and diettia to esdl EBPOETING. 143 in a low tone of voice, so that the other writers will not be confused. A large round table, with an opeiitng in the middle in which the reader might sit on a revolving stool, would be very convenient for this pur- pose. As each writer, finishes the sentence given him, he sticks the slip face downward on a paper-file standing before him, and then is ready to write the next dictation. When the files are full, a boy replaces them with empty ones, and then proceeds to gum the slips together in the following order : 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 1*D, 1 E ; 2 A, 2 6, 2 0, 2 D, 2 E ; 3 A, 3 B, etc. This copy will, of course, be service- able only for the printer. NEWSPAPEE EEPOBTING. § 417. The qualifications necessary in a reporter on the daily presa are varied, and a knowledge of stenography is not absolutely neces- sajy to render him generally successful. His business is mainly to get news and put it in a shape which will be readable and interesting ; and to this end he should possess good judgment, a quick, intuitive mind, ready at all times to perceive what would be of interest to the public, and to jot down the salient points, and have the requisite ability to pre- pare them properly for the press. But, although fOr this the knowledge of short-hand would be very important, as it would enable him to take flown the language of parties from whom he gets statements of facts, 'nstoad of being obliged to rely in great measure on his memory, yet .t can not be said to be an indispensable requisite to the furnishing of good reports. § 418. A newspaper reporter, however, who would be equal to any- thing that may be required of Mm, must also be a good stenogra- pher, as verbatim reports of speeches, sermons, debates, conventions, etc., are so often required, especially by our metropolitan press. § 419. Political meetings in the city of New York are usually held in the evening, and generally the reports of them must appear in the next morning's paper. For this reason, if a tolerably full report ia required, a corps of three or four reporters will be (needed to get it out before the paper goes to press. To accomplish this successfully, each reporter should take notes for from twenty to forty-five minutes, ac- cuT<|kg to the probable length of the meeting, and then go directly to the office of the paper and begin to transcribe. Sometimes each one takes first a short turn of five or ten minutes, and then afterward a long turn of fifteen to thirty minutes, so that he may be transcribing while his co-reporters are taking notes of the speeches. If the speak- ing continues to a late hour, the reporter whose turn comes last is gen- :er#y required to finish up the meeting with a long-hand sketch, which fs best given in the third person. The report of » political meeting 144 THE cavnxni raoNoosApnsB. will be xvTf nodi mora edbedf* and inlanuliig if U lum » profm intradnetioii. In ilii* amy lie indoded • dcRripliaii of the daeonnioM of tlie hell, » rteteniBBi of the Bombar and diaraeter of the penoM praHBt, and, if eaj eminent panons an enong (hem, their nanoe, la nemiiaiwr t^attbtg anoh note latttode U allowed for the Judgment of the reporter than in reporting Uw proceodlnge. It la hii dnty to correct grammatical erroia, improve the oonatroctioa, to imatimM omit objeeiionalila faaagea, and firequantly to almoat rewrite entiie speechea. Hm form of Introdnetioa to nqieeah uaed at the pieient time by the Nnr Toric Jonnula b rfmilar to the Cnllowiiv : Hm Chairman then Intioduead the Hon. Thomaa Jeftnon, who apoke aa Mlowa : or BOK. noHM nmMMi. Than lldlowa the apeedi. If the iptalier waa moalred with applaoaa, that tmA ahonid, of oonaa, bo itated In the IntroduoUon. The in- termpttona hf the andlenoe during the deUverjr of a ipeeoh ihoold be caioftilly noted, and written in bnultela in their prater plaoM. Th» following win ierve aa ffloatrationa : [Applaaaa.] [Oraat ohaering.] {k Toioa, "•DuA't to."] The BtMlnttaai, Uita of Yloe-Fratdenta, and aonettmea entira vpeachac, may bo obtained in manuacrlpt, and the reporter thna raliared fitom mncb labor. With theio fow hinta, the npoctar wiU prohablf And no difflcnlty in giring laliifiMstion io thii fatandi of hla praftmloa. APPENDIX. ft 420 TiiE material from wliich a syBtom of stenography muBt oa oonstructed, is necessarily so limited that it is hardly practicable to furnish one complete and consistent representation for all the sounds heard in the various languages -of the world. Nevertheless, for the use of the student of languages and Phonetics, it is thought ad- visable to give signs for a few of the more common foreign sounds, both consonant and vowel, as well as for those vowel-sounds in the Eioglish language that are not represented with exactness by the ordi- nary twelve-vowel scale. [See §§ 45-47.] Long Short 1 2 3 1 ah air ale 10 11 13 EXTENDED VOWEL-SCALE. SIMPLE VOWELS. 4 5 G 7 rj j ,1 ~\ vieme eat ear all 13 14 13 '16 17 1 — I \! 1 no 18 food 19 at ask met it on lost up uhole cur foot COMPOSITE VOWELS. LoNO : Fr. eft; Ger. long o £xA.HFL£s : queue; Gothe j! Fr. 1. u; Ger. I. ii vfi ;. tibel PllOKT : Fr. m: Ger. sh. S ; Eng. e bef. r ■ Fr. sh. m; Ger. sli. ii Examples : jewne ; boeiie ; her hutte ; lifclse. COMPOSITE VOWELS FOLLOWED BY 1. LojTU : 1'; long 3 and t E.\AMPLES : CEjl 8110RT : ii short and » E:XAMri.E!l ' long ii and t lui't j short ti and 1 \ui 140 TUB OOIITLETB rnONOOBATOBB. MiMU. TOWBU. 4 4SI. Tin nanl vmnb heard in Um Franch and one or two otbtr European langaagea, may be tnttton hy pladng the nanUMd Towv) to the ctem motmt canoded with a ihort tick, written between the onUnaiy vawel-parilione ; thna, -^ an, mt, ;^^ m, ^^ m, ^ m. The fli-hoolc canceled in a dmilar manner may be lued for the lan e inrpoee ; thna, '^ ioH "^^ o/anL SiaNS FOtt FOREIGN OONSOKANT-SOnNDS. naaATiUD lomaN. 4 4SS. We have aeen (§ 0) Uiat certain of tiie aonant oonaonanv wrands hare no breathed mate* in BogUih, and, therefore, no iIkbi lure been provided for them in the ordinary nlpliabet. it, however, tlMto loands thoold be mot with In writing foroiipt wordi, the writer may nee the iigiui oontMOANia. ^ 438. Soveial of the aoond* of coneooantt that In Bngliah are always aijnipta, in certain forrign langoagei partially loM that duvracter and beeoma oonttnoants. Bach aonnde may bo repreeentod In Phonography l _i_..^.>^.\.rl..rl-.):.£^^ LESSON III. §37.1.1 ::^..rr-..:>.1:Sr.^.\//^ 161 LESSON IV, — — — — ^^-r^- ^ TO .~ A ^. ::t_ 1^. _: - .'^ZT". _\rT .:. 152 ^87 ^^^^.\j Srrr-.Js-cir..^ — 153 LESSON V. 154 LESSON VI. 155 LESSON VII. 156 LESSON VIII. -•■•••■•• ^ *TJ*" A "^^i^J • • • • »•» ••• ■■•■■BIB ^^^» •••■••■•■••«»■" !• )rf I 167 LESSOrf IX. c-*rO. 'y^.^u::^.'^.'^!'^.^.^-^^..^: -|- «'^^-'^-5-r\--'^--.>--i>- 158 .rej LESSON X V -V-- §178. ^ \\.h./.f:?..^.f.xA -j- ■V- -^ ?fy 1.V:. uV-S* /?-„^- l^. ^my.Jr^^^^A. i)i9T...l^.VA;^i- 159 LESSON X §20¥. ^^-N «i+V- §209. 160 LESSON XII. I— (B .s^ ^ ^ §§2'^"'* - - T Y '^^■^•^■vi-Af^ .?....'S*-..N-. It.. l-.../..../...-Vt ..kf .>C.X \- V L I. A, A Vc' W> .) O 7--%-?^ -^— :^ '^ ■ ^ Oi- ^ £> 'V "••■V ,^..«..y..^.^..-1..^.5>....j.. ^.;^.>,.-^.^.5...v.^..'■...?.«..^.lr.. .._...-:..,.L.^..f..;t.!^..^'^.V..*.. -d- -v*--^-^- — -^ -^■*^- ....^...„.S_j.-„^„^-^-^ ^-%.^- '^ 5JV- ^ 3' «b *i> --^^--p-^ J?" ^2I*_%»-^ •i^'V ^ ^^^ 161 LESSON XI -^^. >^^-v--^--.i- ^ .^- -^ -Q>TO' :s■.^C. .^. ^^.."^-(k^— ^"^-"S^- §221 \ _-»i^r - - /^ — 1 ^s .rij. ii-. . ^ 226 -Stt^- -^ . ^228 \ .^\ J" ^"".^1.-6230-2 :fj{*_ ^.'M.(}235....\..\iW/. 162 LESSON XIV §^^..X*;^:.'>.?^^.. X'Sr. Sl^t ^:\.. ^2V9 .}. I -1. 4 I. j.. I- \. ^J. i xJV. --v^- ^265 . §286 • 163 \ LESSON XV. 164 LESSON XVI. §276. /^-/rfV-^-^- ^, .^. 1 •I- ly ^ 165 LESSON XVI §285. ^Vf.;:^.^.5sp_ i_J__ — — ■' ■ " ' ■■' ~ ^' ' t}288...C^..^..'J. .. 166 LESSON XVIII. «3o,_..f/...*...^..s^.£..»:?..^. 9^...S>...^..^'3, «o^ ' ( .(..^..L,l.^.>.<..;...^.^.^..L... h3os " 1^ (^ (y (?^ 167 §307 .S..L.p....^' .r_p../. LESSON XIX. -\'- — -,— -<-^- c^. c^.. ()3io ..'^_.Lfl..q.5r_.-— ^-i:^ ^3|i^'^ §313^ jJ_ . V> '^ '^^ C .":^-.(- ^316 x.:L.,-:^-:r.^-.-A.]^. ( ^ ^319 1 .ij320 :^-^-^J-j-^- 168 LESSON XX. 43CT .Z.z...v^^.l..(..f .rr.^.^. .i.i./.?...c-._.^..tr.^.._l.^.Ii. r NL I I ':'..^±..^..:,.1...:,A±A §331 .:^ i.->^' -^ -^- .>o.x L -f- n ■r- ^n> .. ..^-^^--^_ ^ cy ,. 170 e ■ "% ' ■r \ .j.i:..T:^.:^.:..V,...j..s^.,.5«... /^ .;. .^^.^..'.Aj,.. ..c^..J..,|..;_. li^ c — «>• ■*-.^'r?:r:......i .?^.. .^_>..:-..^.r. ?..0..^.:t1.. .^•,i..r..,. 7^ o i^v.tuoi. 171 -1 ^ ^-^^^-^-^-— v---^ c^ -'C^j?- -v«, V^ -\^lc. ^ ^-^ r^ ■ urt _, - - vr"..?>.'.y.. ,..,^. ( ^ x^, __.---_v_S?_ ■^ vi--^- lyC- 172 a /^^^ |ir.. ...... I ^"^-» ^ ^ ^ -gNjj-,--:- "■■-■/S"*" "■''''*^^'^~^ ' \f ^--v ^ -JC... ..........^..^=1 .,rrr7.,--< 173 Extract from'Bamlets^oliloquy. V -a \ jv-,-^^-,- o i- • ^ -C,.A.,... ■.t'^lwi.^ii^ ^ . . ■ ^ 174 >...U.^ - .i..r7?...^...-4.-||-^ ^..x........ . — 4_^.,_^. "U^ .j..TIv^..\--^— J — 4 i ^ d^- »-4 --'•/-- i m 175 ^ ..<^.:::i-.: -p\- U- -,---. "t" .v..(..%^.(.y..,.^.^..ZWt..,.\ .td.-,-:.-^, ( ..V..>^._'.=:v?:. V oM, > -^ --\/x :.rx^. ^ ~^ ■..j..,..,.a^.^ 176 4 -1...S. (. '-k t Ho} 1 -^^ o -<^----l- ^ &- .:::«r?w....V -« 4...SL- ....'^^...x./:..^.......C .,:>..^. _ -%-^,- -V---^-c-^(-»- . y^^....^^^..^..^.. -^'-f-?-: ^ ^ I- 177 h> 4 " '1 ^^ V *--^- :<^/:^^x.^.x "-'-^- A 7 -H'-- .,-~^/a-.\ -><--'-^--t- n -^,-i.-.^.N^.^3^..^?M,..:.^ 'P ; 178 V^ .).\d-;-^-:e..S o _D .^rv ■L- .-,_: L- -- »— b »■>;-» — •■ 3^ „ T « ■^ _fi=r.^_-, _.-,^.L...V..-,^;^ ^ -^v»" 179 .j^:^°_.)...-_..•...^..,.-^..St..^?^^...l- .-^^...n.^-.^TlSC^:.. 0:..fr:!lL.... .(T^i) — . ^- ->^,rt.- X Tyni.ll. ■^--"^— ^-^- ^-..^JX .' ""f-f'^i ^^'A-i^.- .•V JV« I » 1"- -\ - '^ ^ « r ...J™ ^.A. . ^— \ •---•■^---^ X.\.^ J. 181 \Zl. >;f:'t. N.^:i.^.,..WviV^^ ( / ( ^ V r '\^'y 'f--(- -v-c'-'-^->-v /-,.^. i--ii-'^ ' — r^3r- ..;.. ^ \ I c^^^ ■t-^--^"-^b^ ( l.,„. ■^ .....L. 182 -^^ ( V / ( » .^...":>..fJ'..^....(..~..C. / ■ ' --* 4 > • -> v*-o/ f ( t "h 183 ^usirjessX^etUi— J^o. 1. .o^...i^:.: -^-^^ ^.0-C_...:.X. .z^..-::._..L..^..A.>^...'^.. '^^^--Jy^- >q_^^ ,^J: J . . -L (1 . .L. .^. -'Srrr. . -V^//^^^^ U\ . LTl. - ^^„ /57r: r^:— •_ .a~^. -^ "^ ._^.k... >" r- ^ -^-\^>- --i^<% 184 »d ...\yO. L.N.. -0....."rrfty \^J „ -X^.j^. ^....^ -,Q,- s ■\;i^-\^2^ ■ < 4..- / ^.^ .eSL 185 .?...Vd..>-^ .\ t .f/l '"-X ./r7^.-.:./::^x 1186 6S.. lLq..?v.-/r^„/rz^-. N X /M N^ ->« **_#----«* iS-b ) .^l-^-U .(r.ffzs-:. 187 ^ROM^I^EPORT OfXaWjIrGUMENT, -b---^-Y------ (--, X- :>-^-i -^-\-\,-i::y rbi..,..:)..!::/'. ...i -^---^-'-^-■v^ !_ ^ V ---5?-.v->^5'.-. "n;^.- ^ r^. L^.....\ 188 .>,.v..:...!..::Clrn...<..v — *:\..^.'i..j .i_..,.l3../....C.t..*^ ....... Jdk«K.^Vir. X Qualtcr tl7otnatfs^eni)09. /..■;._C..j ate, eat, haw, ho, who, all, ale, eel, daw, thaw, saw, maw, gnaw. LESSON IIL 1. Memorize the short vowels (6) at § 37. 2. Bead or translate the words of lines 1 and 2^11 Heading Lesson III., page 150. 3. Bead §§ 38, 45, 46, and 47. 4. Write phonographically the following words : At, Ed., it, odd, up, itch, of, us, if, on, Em., in. . jjt 5. Bead §§ 48 to 50. '^~ ' '^ 6. Learn § 54. 7. Memorize the Diphftongs (4) in Table at § 54._ 8. Learn §§ 56 to 58. ' w-.-^ . 9. Bead or translate the words of lines 3 to 6 in Beading Lesson III., page 150. "^ ■ 10. Write phonographically the following woi'ds : § 54. -By, boy, bough, pew, tie, toy, Dow, due, thigh, thou, guy, coy^ how, blew, Hugh, eyed, ice, eyes, isle,' oil, owl, lieu. 11. Bead or translate the words of lines 7 to 9 in Beading Lesson III., page 150. 1 2. Write phonographically the following woi-ds : § 71. Abbey, eddy,, ado, Annie, Emma, anew, avow, away, issuei alloy, allay, Eli. — § 57. Payee, bayou, Ohio, avowee, lone. LESSON IV. . - 1. Learn §§63 to 73. 2. Bead the first 9 lines in Bealdiing Lesson IV., page 151. ■ 3. Wiite the following combinations of consonant-signs or stems : I 68^69. P-P, B-B, T-T, J-J, K^K, :E-F, DH-DH, N-N, F-N, H-S, P-B, B-T, K-G, M-B, H-Z, M-S, TH-N, M-SH, M-P, P-N. i. Bead or trsMsIate the words from line 10 to end of Beading Les,SQ^ iV., pages 151, 152'. 194 TDK OOUPLBTR PIIOIIOOBAFIIEII. fi. Write phonagnphieanjr the foOowhig nwdii if 70,72. Gag, baa, calm, knock, coKfmrk,eake,miiiii,oomb,iwrlt, kag, ho^ kick, meek, wtA, king, pop, flfc, fiing, babe, je4n ^i^« Ub^ ■book, cbeapk cap, maicb, nuqi, hatrii, cup, much, mope, ht^/a, keep, nidge, hitch, nytb, eomina, honey, Ukj, body, loedy, duqr, csygr, meadow, easae, daaqi, depth, Cubom, oabfaage, Mondi^, cbinnqy, Chi- cago, tobaeeo, demagogue, antimony, pink, chwik, thank, balk, balk, W«.tip. LESSON V. 1. LMra H OS, 88, lot to 1 10. S. Bead or tnuMbue BaadiDg Lewon V., page 153. 8. Write the foDowiag woida : f f lOS, 110. Sap, Map, anb, aooght, let. May, tald, teat, ned, ilmr, m»I, mil, endi, aage, tack, aoak, leak, lick, aag, Mdb, deva, Sath, ioath, wMtbe, aaib, aign, aang, ran, aillv dng, ioda, eitgr, dnew, aaUow, Mill/, itUjr, pan, pace, poM, dee, ti7«,dnei, choice, jawi, gaa, Ibee, Ibei, thaws, thni, tbto, ■howa, ifaoei, gnawer note, kneea, monae, booM, wayt, yei, oie, kee, ap- peaae, alqna, agea, aecoae, efface, aahea, teuaa, annogri, amaie, amuie, aapa, apace, aeta, aiq«, aagea, wffloe, aaahet, ilnewa, oitiea.— 1 108. Cask, eeawiek, decide d«^ gaip, Augwia, aooede, excite, viiit, duum, viiage, VUk, madt, daeelie, wbp, bnak, Joaeph, tpaMni, imane, uuang, avadra^ I,aatteb maaon, mfaMinft bUnc, oAcer, miudre, phonnib LESSON VL 1. Laam f| 111 to 197. S. Bead or tiantlale Beading Leawm VL, page IS4. 8. Write the MIowfaig words : I 111. Sam, piona, science. Sues.— f 118. JEsop, espy, aside, eschew. { 1 Ifi. Possjr, Tasso, baqr. Jesse^ BtiVt •nme.— f 1 12. Sanejr, saoce, seise. — f 114L Zaasj, aebn, cenith, souare, oosing. f lis. Psnses, basia, teases, doses, chooses, causes, goxes, ftises, viees, Ibesii^ SMcea, niecea, Ifbaea, bouses, opposes, aecsses. — f 120. Possess, Jesos, excise, deceesa^ possessed, otbt, necessity, exbans^ snecessiTa, ineisiTe. S 122. Slop, state, stitch, atodt. More, stung, steam, style, sta^y, stagey, stneeotbeal^ dhaste, guest, aghast, August, araat, assist, asstssed. SI2S. FosW^ jester, caMor, master, Worcester, Lester, BodMstar, yea- ierday.— f 127. Foasasses, emjAadaes, vests^ toast*, dnsten^ ministers.' LESSON VIL 1. Leant {§ 128 to 137. i. Bead or tnmslBte Beadiitg Lesson VH., page 155. LESSONS IN PHONOGEAPHY. 195 3. Write the following words : . . - §§ 129 to 131. Show, issue, sash-, shoes, issuing^ Ashantee, push, cash, gusli, gnash, ambush, tissue, Vichy, bushy, dishes, bishop, shop, shake, shame. §§ 132 to 184. Elm, along, alack,.Eliha, pail, hell, toil, towel, dial, jail, fall, Nile, mule, a|||al, avail, law, all, sail, stale, less, lest,^ lusti-e, lock, leg, lung, limb, Lehigh, lap, allege, laugh, olive, lathe, although, lazy, also, liizzie, Eliza, lash, pillowy bailey, delay, jolly, coyly, follow, hollow, way- lay, yellow, pulp, bulk, polish, abolish, bellows, gallows, malice, ballast. §§ 135 to 137. Air, ere, ear, Erie, era, or, oar, ire, Ira, an-ows, arose, ar- rest, arises, arrests, orb, arc, Iiish, early, bar, door, jeer, far. Czar, shower, liar, lawyer, appear, affairs, officers, forced. Home, rheum, arm, ai-my, TipOj rich, rock, wrath, writhe, rash, wrong, rubbish, Sarah, starry, sor- rows, hurrah, nari-ow, weary, zero, thorough, necessary, urge, earth, party, America, exercise. LESSON VIIL 1 . Learn §§ 139 to 155, omitting § 144. 2. Bead or translate heading Lessoo YIII., page 156. 3. Write the following words : §§ 140, 141, 147. Ply, blue, cloy, day, clue, glue, pry, brew, Troy,-- tree, dray, crow, gray, claw, craw, glow, grow, play, bra}-, plough, brow, flay, fray, flee, free, fly, fry, apple, able, addle, adder, eagle, eager, offal, offer, Ethel, author, eiTor, ably, apply, appraise, across, affray. § 150. Play, psle, blow, bowl, gloWj goal, flaw, fall, fly, follow, prow, power, try, tire, free, fear, freer. §§ 151 to 153. Bevel,, diver, tunnel, dinner, teacher, chapel, -jiigglsj . cackle, Oi-vil, arrival, thinner, shovel, shiner, puzzle, finger, manneT, hob- ble, haggle, heather, hammer, winner, leisure, yoker, baker, tiger^ lopei-, dipper, cudgel, rebel. § 155. Curl, curly, pearl, barrel, furl, fairly, marl, Marlowe. LESSON IX. 1. Lea,rn §§ 156 to 169. 2. Eead or translate Heading Lesson.IX., page 157. 3. Write the following yvordsv § 156. Tell, till, dear, call-,, care, share, more, mere, nor, near, war, wire, wear, wore, zeal, icourse, roll, real, rule, hall; hail, hell, hire, hair,- rtisir, ydl, Tale,.veryj torpor, ch^^er, Gtermany, barber, verbal, collie, Bhai^r, mark, work, yolk, lurch, railroad, divulge. .;•§§ tSS to i'6S. Sable, sabre, SBtfle, setter, saddle, sadder, sickle. Seeker, IStH, social,, saver, seizure, siiiner, summer, rasttef, spry, spray, spree, Ill'fe!,,. stray, streWj screws spjise, ipfesh, supply, passable, peaceable, 196 THE OOUPUBTB PHOmMHAPBlCB. {waceftil, disdaim, daab«7, dingTM, obacnra, pMtai*, pMUy, mtia, tc» try, naabil, sobacriber. fS ICJ, 160. Twist, quart, twin, quOl, dwall, Dwyw, quak«, Qoakar, qnira (or dmir), ae^iira, nqnira, qidbUe, qaonim, aqimw, iqaijl, iqiMbi ■qnabldab iqoeeie, tweann. SS 168, 1 69. Uiucim, iiiicribe, anstrung, intapanUa, nnioriiibla. LESSON X. I. Laarn f j 170 to SOO, owitting §§ 171, 177, 181. 18^ and 104 S. liead or tmnalaie Beading Letson X, page 168. 8. Write the following wmds : f 1 73. BaA***'dfi)rabadoneiawMthnincbaadoailalittla. Whan a wol£%oes to ateal, he goea a long (Uatance ft«m home. None are to deaf iith^ that will not hear. Pay what yon owe, and yoB will know what yon are wortli. Be who bat to deal widi • dmioe haa need of modibnuiit. LESSON XTL 1. Bead SS 371 to 275. 2. Learn ff S76 and 284. 5. Bead or tnuulate Beading Leaaon XVLiPiMB 164. LESgOKS IN FHOKOGEAPHT. ~ 199 4. Writs the following wsMs ; , § 276. LimitaUe,4'lKmit«ble, licit, illicit, legitimate, illegitimate, refuta- blEj iiTefutabl'e, r^oliitei iH'esokte, reparable, irreparable, modest, im- modest, mutabte, immutable, navigable, uniiavigable, noxious, innoxious. § 284. They contrive, you Contimie, excellent composition, perfect command, foreign- commerce, vei^ cumbrous, encumber, incompatible, unconcerned, deCbfflpose, discompose, re-commit, reconsider, -recognition, circumvent, circumference, circumnavigate, circumlocution, continuant' consonants, comprehensive coudiliions. Forward, foKmal, forbearance, forbid. Magnify, magnitii&, magnanimity," magnetic. Selfish, self-defense, self^enial, self-evident, self-same, self-reliance, self-interest, self-love. Withdrew, withheld, \vithhold, within, withstand, withstood. LESSON XVII. 1. Learn §§ 285 to 288. 2. Bead or translate Heading Lesson XVII., page 165. 3. Write the following words : §'285. Eeasonably, forcible, sensibly. Amicableness, suitablenesSj agreeableness, sociableness. Joyfulness, carefulness, painfutness,~mindf|ilness. Destructiveness, apprehensiYeness, pliiloprogenitiveness. Painlessness, gracelessnesSj dauntlessness, carelessness. Whsaever, however, whoever, whichever. Inform, perform, reform, reformed, information. Resting, arresting, wasting, trusting, roystering, mustering, plastering,; ministering, patting, budding, ciiimpetirig, matting, heating, permitting, pleading, breediiig. Bastings, twistings, v6stings, beating, meetings, plottings, holdings.. Fundamental, regimentalv sacramental, instrumentality. Zoology^ mythology, astrology. 'jfliyself, themselves. Townshipj courtship, horseflianship, penmanship. Psaiseworthy, trustworthy, blamewBrthy, seaworthy. § 28fe Fangle, triangle, shingle,- twinkle, finger, stronger, anxious, saitctity, junctioHj winked', ranked. Pasteboard, breastpin, misti'Ustful. PuiflJ)e,d, Gsnsitmption, gliinpse, tempter.— § 287. Essential, substantially. LESSON XVIIL (earn §§ 298 to 306, a,nd 323 a,nd 324. Wtead 0r trmslate Beading Exereise XVIII., page 166. 3i Write the following phrasesa- . 9* 200 Tmc OQMPuns pnoMooiuriutB. § 301. Aa laige, aa had, a« can, ai orar, aa that, aa than, aa ka^ u he, as oaoal, as wooU, aa 7«t, as yow, mach aa, jmt aa, aa w«D, aa mB aa, aa laige aa, as long aa. Has had, has eoaa, has that, baa thia, haa he, haa jwa, has been, has done, haa gone, what haa, which has, that hu, he haa, whara has, what has been. Is that, U ha, la your, ia her, what ia, whidi ia, that ia, he is, here ia, what is jrour. ^ For OS, with us, among ua, flrom as, beTond na, of w, bjr na, at as, Ho oa, abore aa, opoa oa, dutwigh us, aboot os, aroand ns, after u, undar us. SaOS. A8haa,asis,ashia,hasa8,hashia,iaas,ishis,hisi8,asha8 been, as is osnal, aa br aa his, aa much aa his is. S 804. As the, as it, as to, has the, baa in is tlie, ia it, as to that, as lo theas, as it wera^ what is the, whieh is the, ttiat ia the, when is the, where is tiie, gives the, thinks it, nMites tlie, eniera the. f 309. As their, has thera^ U tbun, what is their, iest-aa there, unless tli^are. f 800. As it is, is it as, as there ia, haa it not, it there not. LESSON XIX. I. Lawn if 807 to 820. S. Read or inuMbie Reading Laaion XDL, page 167. S. Write the foUowfaig phraaat: { 807. Bat an. what irfU, bed ail, do all, did all; which will, can M, diat aD, tfaajr wfO, with aB, among all, from aU, he will, are alt, when win, to all, yoo wHI, of aU, on aO, among aU. 1 808. Thqr "f^ ^f* "% on or, by oar, of oar, to our, among oar. § 809. Do we, which we, can we, coald we^ are we, were We. i Sia Had yoa, do jroa, did yon, are yoo, were yon, can yon, eotiU yoo, do yoar, an yoor, where do yoo, how did yoo. f 813. Part of, ehaixB of, which have, can hare, conM hata^ that hnvr^ ibej harci shall hare, would hare, out of, to hare, day o£ § 818. But an, bad an, of an, to on, be and, yoa end, your own, bar own, their own, our own, ham been, more than, rather than, they hare benu § 314. By thdr, op Oere, are there, were their, can diere, to their, of Am, for thdr, on Oten, ^ there, warm their, upon thor, |dan ibdr, ent-fa other, no otlier, some other, that th^ are. § 3IC. Of the, of it, to tht, boat ibe, onght te^ upon the, he bad. § 317. Day afker d^, Sondi^ aftenioon. § 318. Of another, to another, from another, in aaothar. S 319. Of its, on iia, in ita, by iti^ upon ila. LESSONS IN THONOGEAPHY. 2,01 § 320. Do not, did notj are not, were not, can not, may not, you are not. LESSON XX. - 1. Learn §§ 327 to 339. 2. Read §§ 340 to 348. 3. Bead or translate Beading Lesson XX., page 168. i. Write the following phrases : § 327. I object, I do not, I can, I could, I am, I think, I was, I shall, 1 know, I would, I suppose, I heard, I wonder. A half, a year, a man, a thought, an oath, an office, and theii, and all, and will. Of a, to a, upon a, puts a. § ''30> Against the, afier the, render the, cut the, about the, meet the; quit the, around the ; he ought, he did, he shall, he could. § 331. And as, and is, and as a, and as the, and as it, and as their, and is there, and as tliere is. As to a, is it an, has there a, is there a, as to the, is it the. § 332. Boasting a, blasting the, murdeiing a, putting a, beating the, meeting a, bidding the. § 333. We ought, we had, we do, we did, we do not, we charge, we find, we shall, we should ; we would, you would, he would, she would, it would, it would be, would you, would they ; you had, you do, you did not, you take, you shall. § 334. Waste of time, date of payment, hours of study. § 330. To be, to run, to move, to date, to me, too far. §, 338. From day to day, from year to year. CONCLUDING EEMARKS. The learner has now passed over all the principles of Phonogi'aphy. He has yet to commit to memory the remainder of the word-signs and contractions at § 289 or § 290, and to familiarize himself with the deriva- tive words at § 291, the list of conflicting words at § 277, and the list of phrases at § 349. Great assistance in learning the word-signs and con- tractions may be deiived by writing and reading the article entitled "A Trip through the Land of Contractions," on page 203. The learner should now continue the reading lessons which consist of miscellaneous articles commencing at page- 169, using the key beginning at page 216 as little as possible. After this, if the assistance of a teacher can be had to*-correct a few exercises, it will he fonnd a valuable aid. For that. pur- pose the learner may out a slip from a newspaper, write it on alternate lines in Phonography as well as he. can, and send it to the teacher. The lessons should not be too long^-not over a page of foolscap in length. The teacher's coiTections should be on the blank line below the oatfhl,e3 cori'eetsd ; and references to the sections of the Complete il^onogKapher S03 nu oanoum rBumoamuBSM, wwtrinhg the TJohied wIm AaM abe t> fgmt. If ataaohw enaol belMd,agDadsiilMtii>leialolwfiMiidiateibUowiiigplHi: Write* pagaoftlMkaif, aadtiifaMiiipanUwiditlMmgimTadmttUnw. WriM and rewrite eadi pagi until no miililwi are made, and than |irocead to tlw nest. No attempt to wnia hat •hooM be made nntO Um hanier can write vutieutfy* At llu* time it win be of great advantaga to the atadent to iiave MUI fbrdier reading-matter in Ffaanagr^bj. VuCf to toffif diii want, "Hanam'a Phaaagra|diie Mewa," a periodical edited by the anthor, and printed eatiiely in HioMgrqihy.iBpBbliahed. It eontaiu alao nawi, in* itnwtloa, and other infiKniation eonceming die art. It It pabUthed OMMithlj, at two doUaia a year, or twenlj eanta a ifaigia nnmber. Per- iona deriring to anbeeiibo wOl addioai, Jama B. Munion, P. 0. Box 878S,IlewToi1k A TKIP XHEOUGH THIS LAND GI* CONTEACTIONS. 203 A, TRIP THROUGH THE LAND OF CONTRACTIONS, MADE IN THE TEAR 1877. By Mrs. Amalia Beeeian, New York. [Copyright, ISTT, by A^ialia Beemak.] [This ingenious article contains all the word-signs and contractions of the Complete Phonographer, page §3, and is composed almost entirely of those abbreviations. It has been revised by the author from her pre- vious " Trip," which was made from the list published in 1 873. It will be found very valuable to the learner as a means of acquiring the list rapidly and pleasantly, by merely writing this article in Phonography and reading the written copy until memorized. To acquire still greater familiarity, it may be written from dictation until considerable speed is attained^ In writing this exercise of coarse no phrases are to be made. The words printed in italics are not contractions, but should be written with their full consonant outlines, as usual.] According to the suggestion of gentlemen who had the important ad- vantage of knowledge, observation, and, I believe, experience' to help . them discriminate, we bfegaa before September to collect lengthy but cor- ' rect memoranda of the parts of the United-States beyond which it was understood we were not to go. Then the first thing o/" importance was to deliver a dollar to advertise a description of, and gather together here in Southern New-York, a given proportion o/" healthy Christian people, to whom a doctor, with a. certifi- cate from his brother-in-law the Governoi", was indispensable; as our captain, being subject to change, and no vaogel, was a special responsibil- ity without him, and because any degree of iieglect would give that large : perpendicular gentleman frequent opportunity to swear — diiferent from plaintiff or defendant, but in somewhat more general and characteristid~ language. To our surprise a singular representative of the Boman-Catholic re- ligion from Great-Britain came to dwell with us. His populairity was specially peculiai-, difficult of insurance, and not altogether satisfactoi-y ; for, possibly, owing to a difierence q/" opinion as to the probable privilege o/"the archbishop to goyem the county, or the doctrine o/'transubstan- tiation, or what baptism is, he would remember, cross-examine, describe, and make regular reference to any remark of our generally popular Cath- ollo captain. This would astonish another of his reverend brethren, the principal junior member of the bishopric, who was in bankruptcy as to health, wealth, and -his belief in the archangels o^heaven. Our next movement was to go in December *o San-Francisco to be S04 TBB OOMFURB FBOROOIUniEB. then with an architect daring Junaiy and Fabraaix—Mt • Img tIaM, but where om Iws a will and an otjwt he cnn qoi^Qr himidf (• do or Serenl wealthy lepreMntativei vio had &«m <« the MatMdmittti L|^ idatnre over a jrear, and were fiuniliar with the Cabinet and ilt worth, and knew reqionHbly almoct erery other qoeetion or dreamitanca ^tba DeoMcrata, did endeaTW to esuUish fiuniliarity between at; yet if waa moi naoaUy poadble to pnctioe or develop the extnundinuy principle eak at length ia pnblie^ eapedaHy m arehiteotore or architectural man- nfiMtare ; what their immediate similari^ was did not lignlQr. But whan wt ore ra^oniible tar the diarge ^ a number ^jumg ohiidren, BM can not go to avary paitienfau' quarter q/" the Bepoblie. In truth to theae belong the domettic difflealiiei which have ever eome «v, whra im had began to think off waa wdL Oh yea-sir, without mistake, home ahall it the kingdom ^ber that hath iataUigenoe. CooU wt ftnm an erpedal oriatoeraqr, »• would probably awe the Democrat ty the similar, eapabie, and aristoeratie performanee ^out plenipoiendary. But ii*^^; the Democntie half ^ your osienisbad dtfawna, with their nsual iTsiem ^regalaitljy and perpendiculariiy, begin to dlAr, and olfiaet to l e pie ae nt the inflnenoe that Junto/br* gave It ef- tet nqr pablish atreody aitong tliem thit new deliveiy : Kowmber and ihoworidi noworneverl ADDITIONAL WKmNG EXERCISES. 206 ADDITIONAL WRITING EXERCISES. Tlie folloSving additional Writing Exercises are intended primarily to ligUten the work of teachers in preparing black-board illustrations for, or in dictating to, their pii0s. They will also he found very useful to learners who wish to perfect their knowledge of particular portions of tho system on which: they feel that they are weak. The italicized words only are to be written in Phonography. VOCALIZATION 01" SINGLE CONSONANT-STEMS. [§ 41.] The mpe went vp the tree with ease; Ave ought not to eat apples. It does not aid you to add an oath. All the ale will ooze from the leaky keg,^ ,Saeh age has its pleasures. — The bird laid an ec/g in the oak. I am gsiflg to aim at Amy. I sail) pa pay t/ee to Mr. Shaiv. Come and take tea with, Joe Lee to-day. They saw the snow thaw. I coiild see the foe row under the lea shore. — Ma says you may come and see me. Did you hurt your knee OH the key f No. The horse would gnaw his staHe and neigh loudly. DIPHTHONGS. P§ 50, 64, 56.] TheTio^ took a pie in the pew. I heard the cat mew on the mow of hay. If thoa should hurt thy thigh, rub it well witli oil. Mwl^lfw saw him take the toy out and tie it with a string. My cow is very s%., and will not'sMow yon to be so.nigh to her. £§ 57-]; An flEozcee is a person Who has a right to present to a benefice. Hh^ payee is the one to whom money is. to be paid. Noah Owen has just come throMgh the bayou, m a canoe. |;§ 58.] Ida had no idea of goitig on the ice. Ike, Ira, and Isaiah aj'e eonst^mtly eyeing me thrangh the ivy ; hut I don't dare an iota for their ey0, \ : JOINING THE CONSONANT^STEMS. [§' 64. J JBapa, saw the Pope take a peep from his window. Bob tlie iao% took the baby with its bib to t\\9 Judge, The cook gave the girl a cake and the boy a kick. The babe cries for pap, not for a gewgaw^ ©ive us liberty and not ^a^-law. -fS 6S.] Mamma says Mamie is a ninny because^ she keeps so mum. Imki loyes the Wy and looW after the lowly. Mike from Afo«7nee tried to maim John from Miami, Vvee le roi (Erenfih). Fiuo voce (Latin), "Eor much I dread due payment by the Greeks of yesterday's arrear." MM&y with the ' ' ear-piercing ..^e .'" ||j66.] He saw a /ann^ fellow from Vienna having a good time with 4 %^t man: from Lima. 206 TOE OOHFUEnt FBOHOGBAnnEB. [§ 67.] Bqpe does hit ihlg ta the paUie. Ha h fir its 6«m9 ao Aaty I ironld (o. "Tbeperoqt- tion of Ma; or not biimg bdonga no more to theaa m^m ideas, rignUled by tlie terms ' whatsoerer' and ' tiling,' Umb it docs to any otlier ideas." —Loete. [S 68.] A taugo' named Dujfjf called to see S^ki Mo*^. A fuuf man may maim a giant with ttte lath. A piano out of tune lias a bod tffhet upon tlie nerres— o/m a mdodeon. VOWELS BETWEEK STEMa [|?0.] (I.)&rtAorm weotto thetei* toiafAs. "Btnr the po/si •lone." Be left the patk and went to peocA on his neighbor's land, bat , be broo^t no gam* in his pouek. Mr. PUct, a miserable old pokt, bntoghtalragepaet. He triad to ioAt a ea£s. He was more than a mauk for tlM m»i. Let ns tat* a walk and hare a bug taUe He wrote a dimu maatt about a vary tamt dog, Tom Dodgo tried to learn to set 0L)Toamay/W>el!ajMdtofpMMkaiiiff me. He Jlm^ the ;rf9 on a p«g in the ieaa. TIm boom may Jibe over and /nuA Mr. Boolk into the water. Mr. Boaek threw a Ug imig and hit 7tm on the tooth. Dr. Tliy (waya paa|da with his coi^^m. Dkk tried to tip the (aft over. Cko^ Jim gave his ekmm a etedfc. He bild a/6 when he sold be didn't care ajfjr for dte/toM. The aliv> took a (*jr, bat the captain remained aadoet. wonoe n viriCB tbb sicoxd stem u wmttu ix pmitiox of m ▼owH. [|{ 71, 78.] I saw tiw Moi mors on led by a huvt. A moM got in her an;^ and rained it. He made a noteA with his imyk Messrs. (%M and £v!P always A«g> a eoocA to earrg them home. If yon eafcA the bird I win give yon a ea^e to tup it in. Kr. Nook MK bis ecfp and ea^t oat by the eoop. " 'AisafA yoD crimson tme." VOBDB WITH BOKIZOnAI. •*■■•, THB riRST BISISO WBITTEll !■ poemov. Mike ifocifc said he wDold hare won the^^oaM if he had held the !%>. He Boonded a goag to call tlie ^0119 to dinner. Uag sat in a dwdy tnok and called die aa^ to ber. Her aamt waa Mtg, ud die would mock at ererybody who came bar wiqr. ADDITIONAL WKITING EXEECISES. 207 WOEDS SPEELBD ALIKE BUT PKONODNCED DUTFEBENTLT. '[§ 77.] The bass sin|!ers had a fine bass for dinner. Bow to the man who has the iow. Does he know the habits of does ? The fish passed a gill of water throngh each gitt. The breaking of the hinder part of the wagon will Ainrfer tts. He will ?earf yoa through the fearf mines. If he lives he will spare the lives of thejlrisoners. Lower the sails if the sky begins to lower, I can not give you a minute description in a minute. Moxo the grass and put it on the mow. • There was a row in the lower rou) of buildings last night. The au^u^t assembly met in ylu^usf. This gallant officer is quite a gallant among the ladies. WORDS PBONOUNCED ALIKE BUT SPELLED DIFPEHENTLT. [§ 78.] Nothing would ail him if he drank no ale. He ate eight eggs, and for aught I know he ought to be sick. A single awl is all the shoe- maker had left. Jhnrtrayf^e. He owec^ the poet for an otfe, 0/ that I should owe so much to Mm for writing a simple hymn. He stuck his oar in the sand and raised the bright ore o'er our heads. How busy the little bee can be. I will now hie me to yon high rock. You saw the ewe under the yew-tiee. You must weigh the hay on the way to market. AH last week he was quite weak. His sole aim Was to save his soul. There is no reason why you should know it. That it was new he well knew. Why does JSugh raise such a hue because he has to hew a little wood ? Mr. Reid can read music and play on a reed instrument. John Wright can write a good hand and spell all the words right. The swallow ^cto down the chimney ^ue. The carpenter adds an adze to his tools. Why doesthe boy bawl so about a little hallf The farmer raised a beet that can't be beat. Have you been to our grain bin? Too much beer will bring him to his bier. He stuck the sealing-'wax. to the ceiling. He would stand in his cell and sell toys. Did he cite you to court simply to give you a sight of the new City Hall site ? He can climb trees in any clitne. Printers oftenev use a quoin than a coin. It is not fair to chai'ge so much fare. I am frank to say I gave him a franc. With a limping gait he came in the gate. A great fire glowed in the grate. I quickly guessed who my guest -was to be. He hiirthis heel, but it will quickly heal. We can't hear over here. We heard the herd run down the hill. He ran i» the inn. He lost his key walking on the quay. Though a great liar, he played the lyre well. The pretty maid made the slippers with her own -hSrids. ' The marshal put on a very martial air. The miner was twenty^one, and thereforeno longer a minor. He was soon missed in the ihick-mist. He explained the mode in which he mowed the grass. I saw him pare the pear and diyide it between the pair. One, majraise a, castle for another to raze to the ground. I rode SOS TOB OQHTUnrB raOMOOBAPIIEB. ■loag the naif to llw landing, and than r«0«(«eroMtlMriT«r. n«lMt*d, and, naking a wrg ftfot, laid it waa rjr*. Sra phoed hw hand apon bar tidt and myktd dee|^. My «m it oat in the (m. Standing «i • aiotr, he began to «iar« at »& He aaid the lax on tadb was more than be coold |iav. The bi^ iknw a alone Umagh the window. The tyiant was tftrnva from hi* Itrau. Girn na Um» and we will gather idl the ftjriM yon need. Titey Iraeierf the fox across ilie entire (roet of knd. He tried in mm to climb np to the vme. 1 saw a man durt wrigM two hundred pounds teaJa thmogh the muddy stream. Thou^ small in miMC, she can wa«l« mnch. Wait nntU I aseeitoin my vniglit. Be said he awa/if bring a load of ceod. Kse-ctRcu: dktwken stbms. [i 103.] Mr. Ba^, a tmtg old ^ass^p, fidi of itesi't, sat quittly by a eatk of wUittg nntil h« waa;Msiir«f and then be was taken witbrat a fwafe, or the morenent of a nuudt, by an ifffieir named Matoit. (SlooA- by e to Auly, with his a/lt be«»use they eonldn't gitebniL WOBOB WITH WITIAL IME. [§ us, L, IL, and IV.] EUjak Letek, a /aely /mi of the lam,*l»ptd with OKve Lake. Now E^ak was lame, and be feared that die hetdlhg form of the bvdf Olite't fiuh« would laom up before him, and that >>• would lag beavy bands upon him, hg him off, alUge champs agamss him, and ledge him in LedUm Street JaiL But M^ak didn't latk eoniage— naiho' did he /ii^ behind nor walk &9f— tbe eommaads of Ms /bvc for bis dear Oliee were aU that he would foBow. He didn't look back nniil, with the ie//i of a parson, thrir&'ifM wen nniied. And now they ft'ee a Umgiimg life in a Iwfg baw«r on the borders of r. inw^ iujfc* amid il/jme scenoy. ADDITIONAL WKITING EXEECISES. 209 WOKDS WITH riNAL LEB. [§ 133, in.] Ophelia Bailey and Julia Kelley, in the month of JvJy, went to a villa in the valley, where they met Nellie and Delia, and a fellow named Osceola, who was a great bully, and could outlie the wOrst outlaw in the country. But happily for them, Polly and Emily Paley and PAj/o Bulow, in strength a perfect Goliah, and a j'o//^ good fellow, went to follow them through a gulley. Now P/ztYo caught the i!J% and made him bellow loudly, for he beat him almost to a, jelly. So much fur the folly of Osceola. WORDS WRITTEN WITH EH. [§ 135.] ira Aram, an atV^ arwiy ofScer from Brie, had his arm put in a sling by an Irish major, whose ire had .been aroused by /ra in an argument in his modi at a hotel in Rome. It seems this irate son of Bj-in was airing some verses that he had written to Arabella, when Jj'a said they didn't rhyme — in- fact, that every thing about them was awry. Then arose the hot blood of the major, and with no care for law or eric, and more like an Arab than a Christian, he smote the offender from Brie. WOBDS WITH THE EL-HOOK. [f§ 140, 147.] Some little children, in great glee, were at play about a plough, when an ugly boy, with an oval face all aglow, flew into an evil rage — not at all like an angel — and began to claw the cheeks of a little girl as if he would _/?ay her alive. But her brother, who sat on a rail, flew to her aid, let fly a,\i apple that knocked the bad boy down on the clay, ai' J then he ran away ; but the blow made his eye black ani blue. Only the wicked _^ee when no man pursueth. It is really awful to think of. WOKDS WITH THE EE-HOOK. [§§ 141, 147.] Br. Gray, Jr., drew Georgie's tooth, but the boy didn't cry. Men tap the maple-«ree with an anger to get ssip. He was/rec to walk to and fro over every acre of land of which he was owner. Mr. Frye Was eager , for the fray. He tried to crow, but could only bray. Men often pray loudest when they prey on their neighbors most. Mr. Drew came from Troy, where he was held in great honor. CBUISE OF THE "SPEAY." , EXERCISE ON RULES AT §§ 160, 162. Mi;. Sprague, a spry sprig of a fellow; sprang upon the deck of the jajBtt ' ' Spray, " and, taking a segar, immediately sprawled himself lipon a Goil of rope to wait for suppw^- But not being a sober man, but rather a ^pper, he got on a spree and soon turned in badly sprung. When 810 TBS omonxn raoiroom&Kns. Mr. CiUtr awolw him ha «m odbe- and mddtr than my o(b« nan m boMd. Bot Br. Sa^ar, who wai in the parly, law the aot^M thai Spngma was in and eanw to hb MMoar. Th« next d^y the lidi Bum fdt iroagtr, and declared that the opmiMt virtoe wai «M^, and that after that he dioald only he a tmek» «f eidtr Ihioogh a tirm*. Daring aU this time the "£jprqr" was afnriimv ▼"? Baeh, and non ■he qpra^ a leak; hot the crew were tircmg, and they Mpsn haid, and hy the atrefta of their oera and a tlreai of good luck tb«y rtoehad haik, bar, when ^pragm was the Bnt to laramib vp the dock and itrttt hii feet on aoBd land. WORDS CONTAINWQ "STB." Mr. ABlar'i ty tf i iw a a, a native otAm^ria, hot now Nrfaig at Attaria, wai a great ito|(«<-aaMir4tgbta. Eveiy Satmb^, when the Marrg evening eet in, be wooM ttrag away from home and tttr tiralgkt for the Mr* of one John ftory. Now the cyttoHNM'* wifc, J&Mtr, en dariwe woman, who etood behind the cytKr-eoanter, found fludt with her hnriiand'e going m$lrf in tUa w^rj bat he uid he didn't care a Mna* for her mmmit$. But &(/!«• had inrited the ;M*tor of their ebnreh to be then on EaUtr Bonday, and, being ttnng in will, the determined to be tmuUr of die dtnadon ; to after tapper the took her uation by the door, and John SiMy didn't m Mart the ogittrmam of Mr. Aaar antO three dajrt after Eu$ur. WOBIM WITH TBB H-BOOE. CH 170, ITS.] Mr. (hffim orriM to-day brfim /f^ doei. The Ae^waa wrtffped in ia^ paper. Mr. Aj^triedtojMiM the way ibr a /Nijf in the paper, bat Aa editor wat dt^ to all hit hintt. He even went to for at to ela^him aboat being one of the riff-raff fhu are to hard to govtn. Hie aea it rotgh oat liy the m/. Tonr betf It to loajAlliBt itmaket one f«^ to cat it WOBDS WITH THB BH-BOOK. [K 176, 178.] Gtaeral Dean went ont of tomn to tee Dan Boone. Moi Pgae had to pami bit diamond pm and gold dmn before he conld ifiM. Mr. Ann bat got my eoae. Bea took hit gm» OBd AroTC Ae lion damn to hit iln. The toon ram np a tree. Joka gare ■/!■■« a new jvwa in the month etJtae. It is not ^^lea that we get a^oe iaj tar oar/aa. Aaron Hket to tit onier the atae with £E^ and bHi^ phtnograpki. Ifr. ^|}m came o^bae fiom Mauu and arrived between aiae otti wim. The ni^t wet dear and the awoa oiose bright in die lane. Tour or* ie moeh iMnd- KHBO' lAoa anWe. AiDDITIOHAL WBITING EXERCISES. 211 WORDS ILLUStBATIHa IHK . USI! , AND NON-ITSE OF THE EP AND EK HOOKS. [§ 179.]. The doctor got a newspaper puff because he. removed a jou^ tumor. He contracted to ^aue the streets of Paoia. Mr. Duff says Duffy is a tov.gh fellow. Coffee is not good for your cough. The use of too much gravy has sent many a,, man to his grave. A Pawnee Indian will pawn bis blanket for a drink. You can buy a good pen for a, penny. The.fish was ianyand JbAn got a ione in his throat. They caught a tunny fish that weighed three quarters of a ton. He left his gun and cane in the canoe. Dan Cooney shot a coon. ,Jlfany merijfp.ak9 money. Jane changed her name to Jenny. When John was a boy they called him Johnny. It is rainy to-day, and I think it will rain tormor- row. If I am obliged to assign I shall make you my assignee. He is yeryfujiny, but never laughs at his own fun. Fanny lost her^nr The Z>ane call upon Mr. Dana. WORDS WITH THE SHON-HOOK, [§§ 180, 182.] Ris mission was to effect a /msiab. of the two parties. He always showed emoft'on,, and sometimes burst into a ;passJon. One inust use caution in buying at an awtion. He had a notion, that he could save the nation. .You .have no option about taking the potion. The motion of the car affects his vision. There was a perfect ovation the evening he delivered^ his oration. WOKD3 WITH THE TE AND DHE HOOK. [§ 188.]...Pe«er is a. hetter tutor than James; Mr. Potter has a dog that is a good ratter. He is a better vreiter than reader [i2'-Dr]. No one )ikes to bother with bad butter. The creditor feels bitter toward the debtor. My da/iighter is rather inclined to be a doubter. The small boys would chatter and titter and disturb the tutor. THE JEALOUS PUNSTER. EXERCISE ON BBLES AT §§ 193, 195. jMiQ.JoneSf who is just out of hei< teens, went last night to^a dance with: John Gaines. As will beseen,~John happens to be no e/ancer, al- though he does, make had puns almost eveiy time he- opens his mouth. Now it chanced that Jane danced three-rfances and played two tunes with Jack Ransom, a smart young man who knows all the moods and tenses. Biut.as such conduct do^not quite meet with John's approval, because ■ already the, ians have been published, and- John ^ines to have Jane working,six days -each week among his pans- and tins and cans, and on Sunday wearing gowns and gold chains pm-chased with his, cowjt, he 21S TOB ooiiK.nB raoHooxAPaxB. Ukes pmaa to taO Jame'a brother lliat If Jadt A^ to tpmk to tiia fldr J^oMiaadnliewOlftoaMhimtiMflmtioMbaliMadlaaM. Bal/«M'« liMd u tninad and ihs janw Jaek ones men; wfaoranpon John m^ to himael^ "I wiU not bs trMiad to. Althoi«h it rabu and thm b • dmut fo|b I will tdn two enwt, and bofiira the morning dmna I wili biealiJack'aioMf." Then be I0, in Ko. IS.— "7«t J-lam Ptmutr," page Sit, In No. &— '<3)i« J^tiil tmd lAr /Voater," page SIS, in Na 4. KEY TO TME MIBCELLAITEOUS ARTICLES. 215 KEY TO THE MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES IN THE READING LESSONS. WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY. This day is the anniversary of the birth of Washington. It is cele- brated from one end of this land to the other. The whole iumosphere of the country is, this day, full of his praise. The hills, the rocks, the groves, the vales, and the rivers resound with his fame. All the good, whether learned or unlearned, high or low, rich or poor, feel this day that tljere is one treaspre common to them all, and that is the fame of Wash- ington.. They all recount his deeds, ponder over his principles and teach- ings, and resolve to be more and more guided by them in the future. To the old and the young, to all born in this land, and to all whose preferences haye led them to make it the home of their adoption, Wash- ington is an animating theme. Americans are proud of his character. All exiles from foreign shores are eager to join in admiration of him. He is this day, here, everywhere, all over the world, more an object of regard than on any former day since his birth. By bis example and under the guidance of his precepts will we and our children uphold the Constituition. Under his military leadership our fathers conquered their ancient .enemies, and under the outspread banner of h'is political and con- stitutional principles will we conquer now. , To that standard we shall adhere, and uphold it- under evil report and under goodjiseport. We will s'flstain it, and meet death itselfj if it. come. We will ever encounter and defeat error, by dayan^j^ night, in- light or in darkness — thick darkness, if it comen^till .1 "Danger's troublednight is o'er ' And the star of peace return." WejSSVSB. THE LOBD'S PEAYER. Our I'ather which art in heaven, hallowed be thy name. Thy king- dom' come. Thy will be done in earth, as it is in heaven. Give us thig day our daily bread. And forgive us our debts, as we forgive our debt- ors. And lead us not into' temptation, but deliver us from evil: for thiqe is the kingdom, and the power, a.nd the gloiy, forever. Amen. THE TRUE GLORY OE A NATION. The true glory of a nation is an intelligent, honest, industrious Chris- tian pepple. The civilization of a people depends on their indiridual character ; and a constitution which is not the outgrowth of this charact 10 316 TBB OCaCTLBni FnoiHMB&HnEB. ter is not worth tin pHcHungot on vhieh it k writta. Ton look la vain in dM put Cdt n «ing|o inatanoa wlian Hm pooph ImTo pma no J drab KltenicsaftartMrndBTidaaldiunetorwaalait. It i* not In tho naf- nificence of iu palacta, not in tiM IwantiAil creatioM of ait krithad on iia poUie edifieei, not in eoatly libiariea aid gdlariai of ptetam, not in ibe number or waaltli of ita ciiiea, that wo find a natfaw'i i^orf. Tha niler may gadicr aroond him the maanna of the worid, amid a bruaiiied people; ilie Senate Chamber waf retain its fraltl«M propor- tions long afker the roico of patiiotiim ii hndied within lit «aUt; Ibe monnmental marble may commemorate a 1^017 which hai Ibrerer de- parted. Art and letters may bring no letson to a peqde whose heart U The tme ^017 of a nation Is the living Iniple of a k^al, indiwtrioas, ■prigM PMpfe- VIm IMM7 didc tt maciiittarjr, the meny ring of tlie anrfl, die lowing of the paaeeAd herds, and tiM song of the harrast' home are sweelar miBde than the paans of departed giorjr or the sang* of trboBph in war. The vin»«lad ootiage ot tiie UUside, tho csUn of the wood man, and the mral home of the fiumer are the tme ettadab ofaajrooaaiijr. There is a dignity in honast toU which beloop not to Ibe displa/ of wealth or dM homy of fluUon. The nun who drives the ploagh or swings his axe in the forest, or with conning ftngsn pUes the tools of bis aaik, is as troljr the servant of his eountiy as the statas- man la the aenta or the soldier hi battle. The aafoiy of a nation depends not alone on tiie wisdom of the sUte*. meaorlliebiafaqraf ilsgsnersls. The tougue of the statesman never savedanaliaDteMariagtoitslkii; tin sword of a warrior never BH^ed iia MHmeiMM. Wodd yon ase tlie Image of tme national ^oiy, I woidd show yon TiUagas whan the crown end ijoiyaf the peqtoare in common sdwids, when the voiee of pt^yaf goes heavcnwwni, wham the people have that oieat priralws g^ Crith in Godr-Wnmit. EBOM HAMLETV 8(H.IL0QUT. {jtnraBBnio anmaoos nuiarRAiion a* xoa tnn or n Moraaa.] Tb he, or not to be, that is tiie qoasdoB :-» Wlwdier 'tis nolto- in aenSBd, to snffiBT TIm dingy and arrows of oningBons fertane; Or to take aims against a sea of troiAfei, And, I7 oppoaing, end them :— To ffi^'-4o deep,— Ho mom ;— and, by » shop, 10 say wa end The beattaobs^ aod the dMBMiid nalani ilwehs KEY TO THE MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES. 217 That flesh is heu' to,— 'tis a consummation Devoutly to be wish'd. To die ; — to sleep ;^- T(J sleep'! perchance to dream ;^ay, there's the rub ; For in that sleep of death what dreams may come, When we have shuffled off this mortal coil, Must give us pause. AN ADBRESS TO STUDENTS. The doctrine has been held that the mind of the child is like a sheet of white pnper, on which by education we can write what characters we please. This doctrine assuredly needs qualification and con'ection. Id physics, when an external force is applied to a body with a view of af- fecting its inner texture, if we wish to predict, the result, we must know wBether the exteraal force conspires with or opposes the internal forces of the body itself; and in bringing the influence of education to bear upon the new-borii man his inner powers must be also taken into ac- count. He comes to us as a bundle of inherited capacities and tenden- cies, labelled "from the indefinite past to the indefinite future ;" and lie makes his transit from the on&to the other through the education of the present time. The object of that education is, or ought to be, to provide wise exercise for his capacities, wise direction for his tendencies, and thi'ongh this exercise, and this direction to fuiiiish his mind with such knowledge as may conti-ibute to the usefulness, the beauty, arid the no- bleness of hiSflife, How is this discipline to be- secured, this knowledge imparted ? Two rival methods now solicit attention — the one organized and equipped, the labors of centuries jhjivitag been expetided in bringing it to its present state of perfection ; the'other, more or less chaotic,_but becoming daily less so, and, giving signs of enormous pTJwer, both as a source of knowl^ edge and as a meanis of discipline. These, two methods iire the classical and the scientific method, I wish they were not rivals; it is only big- otry and slmiff'sightBiiness that make them so ; for assuredly it is possi- ble to give both of them fair play. Though hardly ai^horized to express any opinion'whatever upon the subject, I nevertheless hqld the opinion that the prOper-Btudy of a-language is an iritellectual discipline of the highest kiijd. If I except discussions on the compai-ative merits of Pop- ery and Pi'otestantisln, English Grammar was the most important dis- eijjline of my boyhood. Tlie piercing through the involved and inverted -e^tences of Faradise Xost ; the linking of the Verb to its often distant ;^^!ai*tiT|a((>of the relative to its distant antecedent, of the agent to the 0(^,fep of the transitive verb, of the preposition to the noun or pronoun 'fillich it governed ; the study of variatjoijs in mood and tense, the, trans- f^soations often necessary to br|(ttg out tbe true grammatical structure 818 . THB ooaauBtB or m KBtenee-«n tlua WM to my jromii mind » diM^Un or dM h^hMl TdM.uid,iiidMd.»iaom«ifuiiflaaiiigd«U|H HowIi^oietdwlMa I fauid a jiraM mOor irippiiiK and wM Mify able » |te Mm to a «ar- ner fimn which thanwai no CNqMi A« I ipaak, mwm of tfw m- teiKawhichesMTandiiiewhmalMqriiMtoiaynooltaetion. "HaihM bath «un to hew ht him hew." ThuwMOMordMm,wh««tha"Ha" ia left, as it ware, floating in mid-air witboBt any verb to wppoit it I »|ieakthwofEnglidi,be(iaineitwaiofrealTaliMtoma. Idom)ti|iwk of other langoagee; beeaoae their educational iraine for me wm ahmM ioMMible. B«, knowlag the value of BagUih so well, I tlKNiid be the lut to dM7, «r eren to doubt, the high diwiiJine iuvolTed bi the prefer atndy of Latin and Oreek. That atody, moreorer.lni other merito and reeommendntieni which have been alraadr di|h4jr tooehed upon. It ii mviniied and i^aierta. liaedtgrloag^ouinMdaN. Itieaninttnunent wielded by lomerftba beMiairileciaorihecouiliyintbeedaoatiwiorjmitbi nndkcan point to rendH in the eeUavMaanta of oar furemott men. What, then, hat a^ianea to offer which it in Oe leeM degree l\Mf to'Oompeta with wch mifmmt C*penklngo<'thaworidandallthatth«;S^^ 220 THK COUFLETS EHOaOOBAHIW. It is lunl fijr thea to kidc agiiiMt the pridn.' And I nfci,'Wlw art AtrnffjotdT AudheiBidi'IaiB JflmiiWlMmdiMipeiMeaMil.' '" But rise, and Maadaptmtbyftat; IbrllumqqwmdanollMlir tliia pnrposa, to nuke thae a miniMr and a winwM bodi «t Ana ttlngi wbidi thou bast seen, and of thoaa diliigi ^ ^ wbUh I wUi i^paar nolo thee; dditwiag tbee from tin peqde and from the GaotSw, wilo whom now I send tlwe, to open Uirir ejrei and twit dun from dai'liuam to light, and from tbepoiTW of Satan onto Ood; that Ik^jr naj laeaiTa f u r gir wa a of riaa and inheiilanee amons them which an MBCtUad hj fiuth that b in me.' " Wheranpon, O King Aflrippa, I ma not diaobedien t onto ^ haavanljr Tidon ; bat abowad fliat onto tham of JDamaaeui^ and at JannalaD, and duoni^MNit aU the coasH of Jndaa, and than to iht Gantilai, that thagr ■bonld npaot aid tnm to God, and do wwiu iMat for rapaatanoa. Ite tliaw eanata the Jewa canght me in tha tanqtlat and want aboot to kill ma. Hafiag ikerafcra obiiinad h^p of God, I oonttnua onto thit dajr, witnamiag bodi to mall and grant, aqlag nana odiv tblngi than iboM wUehthapnpbattaadMoaasdidiagrdkaaUeoBai that Obiitt AonM aaffiar, and that ba dtonld. be tha ftnt that ahoold rlw ftvm the dead, and ahmdd dww fl|^t onto the piBpIo and to dio Gandlai." And as ha thus spake fcr UaatUl Vastu said irtlh a load voiea, "AHd, thoa art barida diyaelft nndi toaming dodi anka diaa mad." BM ha add, ** I am not mad, most noUo Fastaa, but ipaak ftrth dta muds of tnidi and soberness, for dto Ung tawmdi of diese Map, befbre whom abo I apeak ftaaljrt far I am panoadad that nona of tbeaa things aie Uddot froot him; far diis diiag waa not dene In a eonier. JOag Av^ipa,baliBnBt dwn die pnq)habr I know that dwa Then Agi^ppa said nnto Paid, " Afanoat dioa persoadast ma to ba a Cbrisdatt." And Faal mid, "I would to God durt not ontjr dion bat also aU that hear me this d^r ware both almost and altogadm soeh as I am, eseept. these boods." And whan ha had dna spoken, tha king Msa np,andthegoTenor and Beniee, and tbitf that aatwidi them. And whmi ibtf were gone aside Aif talked b e t ae w dunsdras, si^ng, " i:bis man doadmodiiiv warily of death or of bonds." Than said Agtippa onto Festoa, "Ihii naa ndi^t have bcfl aat at ttarlj if ha bad not qfcded onto C«sar.''—ilets x»L Bcsniua MEmm no.|. Mesa*. TMnBEB ft Co., New Toric ToarfinortrfTdi instant is at knd. W« endeaa yw Krmka andBOl ari«dii««f lOObbla. lIa«F«|[;aadWSiUMcflhdlir,pb^ KET TO THE MISCELLANEOUS ARTICLES. 221 ped this day per Merchant's liine, to be sold for pur account as per agreement. We request you not to sell for less than Invoice price, and if you succeed in disposing of this lot satisfactorily, you may be almost sure of receiving further consignments from ns. , We have drawn on you 3it ten days' sigh);, through First National Bank, for One Thousand Dol- lars. Awaiting' your advices, and hoping soon to hear from you, we re- main, &c. \ __., ' ;%DSlNESS I/ETTEE NO. 2. . Mr. Ltman J. Gag-Bj 29 Lake St., Chicago. i ' Yours of the 26th ultimo is received. We are under the neces- sity of declining to fill your pirder upon the terms proposed by yon. On • • receipt of Kfteen Hundred Dollars we will ship the goods, with the un- derstanding that th^ balance will be paid within Thirty Days from the date of shipment. Hoping that these tenns will be satisfactory, we re- main, &c. Kew Yoi'k Superior Court, Part 2. Ti-ancis W. Brodie y vs. . > ' ' James O'BfLen, Sheriff.^ - Before Judge Sanford and a Jury. \ New York, May 18th, 1876. Appearances : fe pfeiiitiff, ■ Smith and Cooper, Esqs. For defendant,, ' Vanderpoelj Green, and Cumming, Esqs, Mr. JSmith opened for plaintiff. Francis W. Beobie, plaintiff, sworn. Ditgcfr examination by Mr. Smith. Q. Whatis your business ? A . Furrier. Q, IJow ipg have yon bfien engaged, iii business as a furrier? A. Since Ii&3. '^ ^ : Q, Pfeviaus tO: thWtiffifi inwhat business were you ? I mean previous to 1965? X I was engaged in the lotteiy business. I was out during the war, and speciiiaited a little in Kentucky. Q,'What SuMness'was your father in in 1865? A. The first part of laSoha was in, the fur business — furrier. , Q.\S?|o6re.was his place of busijiess? A. At this time, when I bought iim out, it was,;58 Maiden Lane. .4,: (By the,CpniPt.) BjFjhis time you mean in 1865? A. Yes, sir. ? Q^;ikave ypu got -.the bills of the stock that you purchased of him at \,„4. YeSjiSir; l^haye, ^ ram oramjcra foonoqkafbsb. Q. What (toek dM he hm on imd Mt dM iiiM :fva aadt Ot f«w diMer il. Halndast(K^inilMn«lghbariK»d«rftlO,<10a WiUMH pmdMaa the Mb. Q.Lookatthttpqpa^-«hai■thatr (H«ndi it to HtiMn.) it.Utt M • faOl or #4548. the 26ih oTMi^. Q.Did700|imx:hMetbMfaillorgaodar it. I «d. d. 10* 224 TOB ooatPURB rnoxooBAriiKB. QUESTIONS OS THE COMPLETE PHOSOGRAPnER. GENEUAL MtMABKS, Hon.— n* ki|» anni In Om Bsigta nkr to anUoM 1. L DafiiM FboiMvap^- S. A* oMullly nndtntoo^ how is the twn applied r S. L How doet the mMnw of wiidng PhoDOfrapliy diffinr finm the writmc of lontJMiul r s, A» ntuxli ootMODUia ud roirab, wlitt U iho munnd order of preHMatiaof SIMFLB OONSONAMT-SION& 9. WhatiiaeonMHMiitf 4. L How many dnple eomoouit toandi we there in the Engliih kngnagar ft or what are cA aad^ eompoMd r 8. L What dooi Um nble ofOoawmaiita exbibtir ft WhatdoUMwremlcafammiofibatlaUeoonlalnf 8. t Wl^arethoimfdareiaBqilaiorortbograpbjriiitheTaldeof OnwmiMiH pwewied fluty ft What •boald the leaniar aBdaamr not to aaioclaie toyodMrr 7. L Hcnraany eoDioaaBia Id the labia are arruiied in pain r ft Oira tlie leaaon tat their being ao arranged. 8. Wl^ an one half of the rigm in pain made light, and tiie other hdfhaa«7f 9. mn^ an not the remaining rfgni of the table arranged in pain Y IOl How doea the arrangement of the eonwnanli in thia section ctatflf/ them? n. L In how man/ diftsions are the consonants ammgsdf ft Name die dinaionB. ft YHtf ate dw abnpU so cailedf a. Define eBBtMaaal*. ft Define aasa&L ft Define £;iadk. y. What are eoaiaeeaU and llie o^AuUt IS. 1. How are the consonant aoonda in f 10 arranged as iqguds tbdr mode of fonnation ? ft Into how manj chuses am tliqr thns dirided, and wiMt are their namesT ■iSb L la aoondiagtlielabiala, what action is giren to the month? ft Wliat in sounding the iairio-dentab? QUESTIONS ON THE COMPLETE . PHONOGEAPHEE. 225 3. What in sounding the linguo-dentals ? 4. What in Eounding the palatals ? 6. What in sounding the gutturals ? 14. 1. To what is the brevity of phonographic forms chiefly owing ? 2. What is the source from wliich.the consonant-signs are derived ? 15. What requirements of an^ogy are observed in the phonographic alphabet? 18. Wliat are single consonant-signs called ? MANNER OF WRITING CONSONANT-SIGNS. 19. In how many directions are the consonants vrritten ? 2Q. How are horizontal letters written ? 21. How are perpendicular and inclined-letters written ? 22. 1. When standing alone, how are sA and /written ? 2. When joined to other stems, how are sR and I written ? s. How is ree, the straight sign for r, written ? 23. How are sk and I named ? 24. , 1. Hqw are chay and ree distinguished when standing alone ? 2. How when joined to other stems ? ^ .25. 1, What should Phonography be written on ? 2, What should' the learner accustom himself to write with ? 3. How should it be held ? ' 4.'. What should the learner aim at in the otitset ? 26. • What ^11 happen if the learner attempts to write fast before he has acquired accuracy ? 27. What length for the consonants is recommended to the learaer"? 28. 1. How should the heavy curved signs be made ? ■ ^ 2. What should be the length of the curved consonants as com- pared with the straight ? SIMPLE VOWELS, 31. What is a vowel ? 32. 1. How many vowels are there in the English language T 2. What are they ? 33. In producing each of the short vowel-sounds what is the ppsition of the vocal organs ? 34. 1. Eor the twelve Vowel-sounds how many letters does the common alphabet furnish ? 2.' How many signs does Phonography provide for them? 35. 1. In what.order is a-.w.prd written phonographically? 2. With what signs are the long vowels written, and how are they placed to the consonants ? 3. The saine question as. to the short vowels. . 2£6 IBB ocncrtBCB VBOirooBAraiCB. S6. W]ienisan>iral«idtotolnt,neaad,«-aiM|iiM«r «7.« L WbaticUwnatareorilMdatToirabr 1 Wbmt of dw duh wrabr as. How an the Towcb Baaed r S9. LVHiara it OeflntwirelpiMitiaB OB 1^, «*,«■/ 9. WbwB U dM IhM porftioBr a. Whwe k Oe fint poriiion ob /•• aad ntf «. WhM« w dM third paritfoar VOCAUZATIOH OF SIMPLE C0MS0NAIIT.8TB1I& 41. L \nMa a Tomi ocean baCm aa iqH||iit or liaiitlBg i wImtb k iM i%a wiiuaBr i: 1 Wbere wImb it eons altar r a WharavhaBitoMBnlNlbiBalMriiOBtalslBBr 4 Wbare wImb it coaMt afiw itr 42. InaiiiwraaMkirhatiaalvnqnwrittmArMr 41. L WhichrfdaoracaaMaaatHMamBiMtBTowd-iigalMpluadle Iwnadintr 1 WUdiddeiobanadaftartkacaiMaaaatr 44, L HovitealdihtdailinnrabbtwiittaatoaaitaaMr ft BowdiaaUboAdMaaddailiTOwalcbowriiianr 4f ft la aadi words at ktr, iM,firt ft la taA vttrdt at car, hm,firt DIFHTH05081 "-'' 48. WhatitadiidillMBgr ^ ^^ 49. How Bia^ ^pliilioBci are thevet '' , . -r^sj- fiO. L AoaljraediefiphtlKiBKt. ' ''' ftABal7»<<. ;', ftABalyaeov. ^ 4. ABalyae tm. 64. L HowaretliefiMirprapard^tlidioitgtnpieHBlcdf ft How naBj BK wiittanfn llMfint potion ? ft Howmanf iBilietliiidT 4. Aroaiqr written in die leooBd? '*''" 66. DothediphdioBe-i^BtcliaBgeatir in f Hiw t io dto e etwqM B d^idi die direciiaB of die eoBMnaBla ? 67. VnieotwoTOwdtoeeartogedieriliowanflMgrwiittaB? 65. Wliicbdi|ilidiencitiOBiedaiBijoinadtotbei QUESTIONS ON THE COMPLETE PHONOGRAPHEK. 227 CONSONANT POSITIONS. 59. 1. In how many positions are consonant-signs written? 2. With what do these -positions correspond? 60. 1. What is the first position of perpendicular and inclined stems? 2. What the second ? a What the third? 62. 1. What is the first position of horizontal stems ? 2. What the second ? ' 3. What the third ? ^ JOINING THE CONSONANT-STEMS. 63. 1. In writing a word phonbgraphically, what is the first thing to do ? - 2. What the next? ' a What are the.consonant-signs of a word when so written called 1 4. What is done hefore any of the vowel-signs are inserted ? e. State the only exception. .64. How is a straight consonant repeated? C5. How a curved consonant? 66. Between what stems should there be an angle? 67. When two stems, tjne or both heavy, that do not form a distinct angle are joined, how should they be written ? 68. Between what stems should there be no angle ? 69. In what order are consonant-signs read ? METHOD OF WRITING VOWELS BETWEEN CONSONANT- SIGNS. 70. l/WIien vowels and diphthongs occur between two consonant- stems, which are written- to the'first stem ? 2. Which to the second stem ? 3i State' the exceptions. POSITION OP WORDS. 71. 1. In hpw many positions may Words be written ? 2. With whatdothose "positions correspond?" 3. What' are they called ? 4. When is a word written in the first position ? 6. When 'in' the second ? 6. When in the third? ' -J.-Wih^/'determines the position of a word containing only one vowel? , 72. 1. When is a word Said to occupy the first-position ? 2. When the second ? ' - " 228 TBB cxiMFum pnoHooKArnsBt TS. 77. 79. «. VthevoideoBrirtaattinfyoriioriioaial iltau,wlMl dMmiaM tbepoiiiiniardwwgrir State the mental and namwl procMt of writing • woid glw. noKrapUeattj. * FHONOGBAPHIC ASALYBO. 7C LIniJiecbli^Mf«,rf;i«, Ume,twmr 5 91. Wliat is die aoaad et-u or em after the eomoaaat r. 92. WIieniannaooenledBynableathepreaiieqaali^afanwdeaanot be leadiljr delennined, how k it ngaided 7 W. AaeaegftJoM^ gyre aoBieiihtnrtioaaia which aaaetartadtywtii letaia tlidr pnper hag aoaad. M. In jbenopi^ VcOinft what is d^w tol^ saeond, M^aad: las*|y7 QTXESTIONS ON THE COMPLETE PHONOGBAPHEK. 239; ESS AND ZEE CIRCLE. 97. What is the name of the ess-circle when standing alone ? 98. 1. How is the circle joined to straight stems ? 2. How to curved stems ? - 99. How are stems with ess-circles named ? 103. 1. How is the circle written between two straight stems both of which are struck in the same direction ? .2. How between two straight stems that form an angle at their -junction? . ^ . 3. How between a straight and a cr.rved stem ? 4. How. between two curved stems if both are arcs of circles that ,'. , are struck in the same direction ? , B. How between two curved stems that are arcs pf circles stnick in ppppsite directions, axt^ that do not foi-m a distinct angle at their junction ? ,' 6., How if they do form a distinct angle at their junction ?, lot. State tlie short rule. VOCALIZATION OF STEMS. WITH CIECLES. 105, How are «tems with circles attached vocalized ? . "jfoe. Give the order of reading vocalized stems with circles attached ? 108. When two stems have a circle between them, hqw are intermedi- ate vowels written ? '110. Where is the circle generally used ? 111. When sotzis immediately preceded or immediately followed, by r two concurrent vowels, what sign should be used, and why.? 112. When two's sounds ar« the, only consonants in a word, how are they written? -Give examples. , . 113. When s is the first consonant in a word that commences with a vowel,'^'which sign is used ? 114. •. When a a sound commences a word, what sign is used under, all circumstances ? 115. When s or 3 is the' last cpnsonant in a word that ends with a .: »o!oe?, what sign is used? THE LARGE CIRCLE. 116. Whenis a large circle used? , . 117. 1. What is the Bame of the large circle? 2.- .What cpnibinations is it commonly used to represent? . . ,118. i^Howisit joined to consonant-stems? . -,,r2; Where may it be used? -, 11 9. Hpw are stems with the large circle attached vocalized ? ^280- tBK oQiaumc raommuroMM. uo. Row mqr • TOTCl tint aeon iNtiNM dw two MModt orivii circlet be nfnMntodr LOOPS TOR ST OR ZD AMD ST& 12S. BowmnihtmmaaamaaAtJgtuiaiijnpnmmit 12S. How JB Hr ftoqmmjy rmrawBlodf U4. L WhirtarailieiiuBeiordNwtwoloapar >. Hown^jstmiwithloopoattMhedboiiniMdr USw L How an teaiM wiiii Io6|n atladMd ToediMdr 1 WberamaythenaaUkioplwaHdr I Wherathe iMfB loq^r 4. When b Um Ih|b loop not iind r 1X7. How mqr the nail cfado be added to the kiM d(de aad the ioo|Nr BULBS SOB THE USB OV ISH, 8HBB, EL, LBB, SO, AND 129. t b what eaMb the Mnal written downward^ ft WhatbitHwDealledr IM. 1. lawhateaNibalwilimqnranir & What bfe then caOadr in. L When b/ written dowawaidr ' & What b it Oan called r Itt. L WhenblwriMni^warir ft What ta it dien odledr IM. Whkhbprafcned in tiie middle orwoida,*{ or {Mr ISS. WbanbtedowMtmkearoMdr laS. When b the downttnke rte naedt 187. Whldib p w fen edinthemlddleofwCTdt,«rorr««y nirruL hook& US. L Kb what lelation to a preceding ooBionaatafe the Uqiiida/Bal r finad in a lugfi mimber of wordf 7 ft Ghre esamples. - ft How are andi eo mp o mK b i c pw ie nt e d in Phonogmpbyf THE ML JLWt U lieOU. 14a How are the cMuwka written on atnd^ and carved iteaif 7 141. How are the arJioolH written on aoaight aad carved ftanif 7 143. At whidi end oTe/ aad «l are tboM hooka Joined 7 144. HowaradieelanderfaaolE'Cignananied? 145. What cantionbpvcB with nguid to the «/ and «p hook tignc7 1*6. How may the leaner be aMiaied in icmaiAeriag the a( and , 229. When it is necessary to distinguish between tee and dee, how may ■ - it be done? - 280. Wliat is half-length ?ee when standing alone used for? 231. When a word contains only the consonants Id, how are they writ- ten ? . 232. How are rt and rd distinguished ? 233. When i or d is immediately preceded by two vowels, how is it" written ? 235. What rules apply to the upward arid downward half-length stems ? GROUP VOWELS ANB THEIR SIGNS. 240. 1. How are the improper diphthongs represented "? 2. What is indicated by making the first or second stroke of a group vowel-sign heavy ? 3. Which way does the signs representing the dot vowels in com- , bination with i open ? ^ 4. Which way those representing the dash vowels so combined? '242.' What may be used instead of the double vowels?. .'? 243. When i precedes the diphthong i, oi, and ow, how mayit be rep- " , resented ?; , ^ . , 244-. ilow when it follows them ? 284 IBS ooaoint nxaooMAiwau ats. WhuUecDMuaBinndiailMnaoribaHiigiMr ADDITIONAL OONSOyANT-SIQira. 247. WbenbthedotiignfiirAnMdr US. When (he tick rign for «r 249. LWbaDilMbritfiipifbrvr a. Whm tlw brW rign for y r 250. WlMtittlwMaiBaleoiMoiiant,«idhowbitiindr STENOTYPY. 251. Howiiiqr|diooogrHiliieoulliiMilMiiuUctl«dbTih«ktl«nordM onUnwy iiriutaig a^betr 252. IawlMtai«ilwMM09pMorq>-«rokaMeini|iriiitadr 26a. Uow are die aMRoqrpM of iIm tMm diai dittiagntalMd (him lb* •um^PH or dnte. bM|M, booki, dota, and tiekt r 258. L What ditaa a hxiiiMB between two •taiMfnphaladiealor t. Wbat as inaitad ■emicohm r » Wbatafeoloaf «. Wbat an inmiad poted r ft Whalaowir a. Wfcaiaria)^i|iaeer I What a namenl Jait after tha itanoQlia r a. How era MonoiTpei namedr OENBBAL REMABKS OH OUTLINES OV WOBDS. 266. L When to Ibe anal pliable ^resprcMed bribe «UioAr 1 InolbereaMiboirto^wrftCHit 266. Wbat to the mleia regard to WTiiiilK die flnal^UaUe Iff 267. L How may iba final ig^lable 9 lometiiiiM be written f 1: For wbat pnipaae to tbto exeeptioaal proridon allowed? 269. How may tbe Baal i^Bablelarvionieiiinee be written r THE FAST TENSE. 270. L How ia the peat tenee of r^gnlarTeriia written when tbapneent toue endi with a fiiO-length item t % HowwhenitendiwithahaiMeogthttenif a. How when It eaiM with an e»«irde not written loaide of « final hooiL? *. How when it end* with the «f-loapf QtTESTIONS ON TUK COMPLETE FHONOGEAPHEE. 233 ABBEEVIATIOlSr. yOWELS OMITTED OE INSEBTED. 273. What vowels may the beginner now commence to omit? .274. What vowels should he still continue to insert ? ■WORDS DISTINGCISHED BY DIITEEENCE OF OnTLIKE, ETC. 276. How are words commencing with il, im, in, ir, un, en written ? 277. Study the list of ;n'0rds distinguished by difference of outline, po- sition, or vocalization. OMISSION OF CONSONAKTS. 278. Under what heads is the omission of consonants treated ? 279.- To what does the term " word-sign" apply ? 281. Learn the list of word-signs. 282. How are now and new written ? PKEFIXES. 284. 1. How are the syllables com, con, cum, and cog indicated ? 2. How are they written ? 3. What should be done in words commencing with self-cen f 4. What license is allowed in regard to these syllables in the mid- .,^ die of words? 6. How xsfor sometimes written ? 6. How magna, magna, or magni ?■ ' T.tUow self f .V .■ a Whai is the prefix for se//" joined, and when not joined? 9. How is the prefix with written ? SUFFIXES. ,2So. 1. How are the sufiixes bh and bli/. written ? ,' '2. How are bleness, fulness, iveness, and lessnessf 3. Ever? i. Pormt 6. What is the suffix-sign for ing ? ■ 6. Ofingsf V. When are these signs used ? . ■ 8. How are the suffixes mental and mentality written ? 9. Ohggf 10. Selff , 11. Selves? 12.. Ship? is. Soever? U: Worthy? TOB osamjBOi raoammAraau wMwuimi or cmjin oomoMim. 286. LWbm may ft or jF be omitted flromirordsr & Vrbenaf MMwd? a.yrht»pr 4. WlMOar & Wbeaaif SS7. How are word* ending in Bltal-^reUiraTialedf 288. Wben may cooaonania, rafmianted hf hwdu, be omitted f '' 289 and 290. etuiy theae Una diorangfaljr. 291. BaadUii4ookr JOO. Vor iriMt dw wqrteokr 810. Ibr what the yar^ookr 811. Fw what the Mioakr. 812. Tor what Ae^^hoolit 818. 1 Vior lAat the o-hoolit s. Withfai what flnal hooka may an ca-hook be tnrnedr & How iaaqrmea written f 814. For what i* the (cr-hook and leDgtheniog principle nted t 815. Whenneeeaai7,howma7otWand(i(6-be£ftin(idthedr 816. For what is the hairing prindptemedr 817. Forwhatthef^-hookandleagliheningprineipiecombiged? SIS. Forirfiat the e»-hook and lengihening principle combined r 319. . Fbr what the hairing prflid|de and e»di«le eombinedf 820. For what the eaJiook and hairing p*indl*e comWned? 321. llaydief*ibaithpiMitioof SS7. Wbenfaor(Mb«Biiii««eBl«nM,howtlHNiMitlMwritlnT 888. How mayjitm — to ba indicated t 389. May oarf iMaaoMtiinH omitted T BULBS SOB FHBASE-WBrriNO. ' 840. Staia the genenl rale for joining inxdi in a phiaM. Ml. 1. What may phnuM be eompoaed off 1 What 1« it Botneceaiiiy for tbe writer to think of while mridag phraaeef 813. What may a noon or pranooB in the olijeetirecaMba Joined tot 818. What may a TCih be joined tor •U. WhatmayaqaaiiQriocwordhejobiedlor 845. What may a noon in the pawMilTe caie be jollied tof S4«. What may a Mri> in the InllnliiTe mood be Joined tor 847. What mi^ a oopalaiiTeooqJnneiion be Joined tor 848. When the idiom of the kofoaa* rtquirat one word lo bllow an- other, wha nu^ diqr he Jolaadr 819. Study this list earefhDy. 850. L Whan may ipedalphnMs be made I7 the reporter r a. Should Mdi ipeeial idiiniai be nied in general nportiogr A NEW AND SIMPLIFIED CLASSIFICATION AND ABEANGEMENT OF THE CONSONANT-SIGiq-S OF PHONOGEAPHT, WITH A NEW AND COMPREHENSIVE RULE FOR VO- CALIZATION, AFFORDING INCREASED FACILITY IN LEARNING THE ART. By JAMES E. MUNSON, Official Stenograplier, N. T. Snperior Conrt, and Law and General Verbatim Ee- purter since 1857. The different kinds of consonant-signs used in Phonography may be classified under four distinct heads, and arranged in the following order : • - I.— SIMPLE STEMS. ^ Under this head are comprised all the sinjiplef''alphabetic stems. Examples: \ P, \ B, K, G, V^ F, l^ V, ) S, ) Z, ,-v M, ^^ N, etc. IL— HOOKED STEMS. Under this head belong all the signs that have hooks, whether the hooks be initial or final. Rtjlb I. The power of any hook, whether initial or final, tak«a effect after the power of the stem to which it belongs. Examples : \ PI, 'X Pr, c^ Kw, ,^ Ky, _^Ef; \ Pn,V^ Fn, _j Kshn, V:5 Fshn, — ^ Ktr, etc. Rdle II. The power of any initial hook takes effect before that of any final hook on the same stem. Examples: ,_^ Grf, Q^ Fhi, e_, Ewtr, "-^ Kltr, etc. III.— MODIFIED STEMS. Under this head belong the Lengthening and Halving principles. Rule. The power of any modification takes effect after the power of the stem that is modified, or of any of its hooks. IBiitraBff, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1867, by James E. MrrSsoN, in ~ tbp Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Sontneni Dlr^det of New York. U 240 TOB OOUPLKTE mOSfOOBA^IXB. BxAitrutB: V, Hftt, ^ Fllr, '""^ Mnlr, _ Gt, ^B3^ _Krt, c Kwt, v, Fft, % Pint, v, Ptfmt, >> Ptrd, ^ Pint, \ Pni«, tUt BUUt VOB TOCAUZOia A Towd-«ign placed ft^orw « stam b rend belbra Iba ■Urn, ud cunaeqaenlfybdbreanyoriiabookaaadiBodlfloatioiu. A.voiral- rign placed ^ter a stem, is read litor the stem and tnj Initial liook, and before any final bode, and oonaeqaenlly before any modi flcailon. Kt * mi' l e s; •|a,^.i^itiMlir, Vi, eows O «•«*». -r> «•««•, Ay P"***" /^ '*''*''• ^T>> "•«<*•''. ^,_^M«Mfer, |. ifaft^ _ M sPratf, S M*fui, >^. tiftpfvwd, etc. ly.-CmCLES ANB LOOPa Altbongh Ibe Cbclos and LoqM are gencntlty Joined to a stem, tbef ore muKrmuiun ' uoks, and are not to Im considered as forming any part of tbe ulcms to which they ora Joined. Hence tlie following rules : ftaiM L When a circle or kx^ la Jcrined itUOaUg to a stem, its power takes effect >(/bf« anylUng dso— that is, before the po#er of the stem, sad of all Ito books and modlflcstlons, and of all its Towel-tfgna. 'BxAMFVu. \ sP, ^ «, \ sn, (>_ iFl, ^.sMr, =- sKw, •\ sPr, <\ ssPlr, V «Rfi (^ *I», <^ "Kt, «. stKt, ssFDd, •^-mat, \ idU, "\ softer, ^' uubn, ^(~ piaU0r, (^ dmOer, RoLB n. When a circle or loop is Johied finoB^ to a stem, its pow«r lakes eflbeti^lfr ereiylhhig else— that is, after the power of the stem, and (rf aU Its hocAs and mo^Uflctttfoos, and of an its Towel-aigns. ExAHFLBS: _^&,V^T», _oKss,V^IW,— Kst,^Kstr, C Tw8,_«Kfc,_aKriin8,^?Mm8, "=> Ktrs, U Tns, >v Pns, I Dnas, -^ChMt, \ Piistr, ^-^ Mtra, ^~* Mntrs, _Kts, ^ Kdst, \ "Dttm, -. Knts, % Btaids, % Bmds, .\. tetu, ■ l^ tj/Kndm, y Mte, s^ Nnub, S brand*, etc. •tti' NEW CLASSIFICATION OF PHONOGEAPIIT. 241 Note. — The In-hook, as in 't^^ unstrung, ,^\^ endave is read befcn-e the circle, because it is written before it, and is an independ- ent abbreviation or substitute for a preceding consonant-stem (N) ; and the Ishun-hook, as in -k^- physician, is read after a circle or loop, because it is written after it, and is an independent abbre- viation or substitute for succeding consonant-stems (SH and N); THE END. !"4 \